LG | 19LG3100 | LG 19LG3100 Owner’s Manual

ENGLISH
Trade Mark of the DVB Digital Video
Broadcasting Project (1991 to 1996)
ID Number(s):
6337 : 19LU4000
6423 : 19LU4010
6338 : 22LU4000
6424 : 22LU4010
6334 : 19LU5000
6428 : 19LU5010
6425 : 19LU5020
6335 : 22LU5000
6429 : 22LU5010
6426 : 22LU5020
6336 : 26LU5000
6430 : 26LU5010
6427 : 26LU5020
6200: 19LH2000
6437 : 19LH2010
6431 : 19LH2020
6201: 22LH2000
6438 : 22LH2010
6432 : 22LH2020
6202: 26LH2000
6439 : 26LH2010
6433 : 26LH2020
6203: 32LH2000
6440 : 32LH2010
6434 : 32LH2020
6204: 37LH2000
6441 : 37LH2010
6435 : 37LH2020
6205 : 42LH2000
6442 : 42LH2010
6436 : 42LH2020
6206 : 32LH3000
6451 : 32LH3010
6447 : 32LH3020
6443 : 32LH3030
6208: 37LH3000
6452 : 37LH3010
6448 : 37LH3020
6444 : 37LH3030
6209: 42LH3000
6453 : 42LH3010
6449 : 42LH3020
6445 : 42LH3030
6210: 47LH3000
6454 : 47LH3010
6450 : 47LH3020
6446 : 47LH3030
6211: 32LH4000
6467 : 32LH4020
6463 : 32LH4010
6212: 37LH4000
6468 : 37LH4020
6464 : 37LH4010
6213: 42LH4000
6469 : 42LH4020
6465 : 42LH4010
6214: 47LH4000
6470 : 47LH4020
6466 : 47LH4010
6484: 32LH5000
6455 : 32LH5020
6459 : 32LH5010
6485: 37LH5000
6456 : 37LH5020
6460 : 37LH5010
6486: 42LH5000
6457 : 42LH5020
6461 : 42LH5010
6487 : 47LH5000
6458 : 47LH5020
6462 : 47LH5010
6195: 32LH7000
6529 : 32LH7010
6475 : 32LH7020
6471 : 32LH7030
6196: 37LH7000
6479 : 37LH7010
6476 : 37LH7020
6472 : 37LH7030
6197: 42LH7000
6528 : 42LH7010
6477 : 42LH7020
6473 : 42LH7030
6198: 47LH7000
6480 : 47LH7010
6478 : 47LH7020
6474 : 47LH7030
6481 : 32LF2500
6618 : 32LF2510
6482 : 37LF2500
6617 : 37LF2510
6483 : 42LF2500
6616 : 42LF2510
6488 : 32LH4900
6489 : 37LH4900
6490 : 42LH4900
6491 : 47LH4900
6755 : 32LG2100
6756 : 37LG2100
6757 : 42LG2100
6191: 50PS7000
6192: 60PS7000
6193: 50PS8000
6194: 60PS8000
6558 : 42LH9000
6557 : 47LH9000
6831 : 55LH5000
6868 : 32LH3800
6869 : 37LH3800
6870 : 42LH3800
6825 : 19LG3100
6826 : 22LG3100
6827 : 26LG3100
6189 : 42PQ3500
6190 : 50PQ3500
6186 : 42PQ6500
6908 : 50PS6500
6876 : 32LH3040
6877 : 37LH3040
6878 : 42LH3040
6879 : 47LH3040
6880 : 32LG3300
6881 : 37LG3300
6882 : 42LG3300
6897 : 19LH201C
6898 : 22LH201C
6899 : 26LH201C
6900 : 32LH201C
6901 : 37LH201C
6902 : 42LH201C
6904 : 32LH301C
6905 : 37LH301C
6906 : 42LH301C
6907 : 47LH301C
6927 : 32LF5100
6926 : 42LF5100
6925 : 47LF5100
6954 : 32LG2200
LCD TV
LED LCD TV PLASMA TV
OWNER’S MANUAL
LCD TV MODELS
19LU40**
22LU40**
19LU50**
22LU50**
26LU50**
19LH20**
22LH20**
26LH20**
3 2 L H 2 0* *
3 7 L H 2 0* *
4 2 L H 2 0* *
3 2 L H 3* * *
3 7 L H 3* * *
4 2 L H 3* * *
4 7 L H 3* * *
3 2 L H 4 0* *
3 7 L H 4 0* *
4 2 L H 4 0* *
4 7 L H 4 0* *
3 2 L H 5 0* *
3 7 L H 5 0* *
4 2 L H 5 0* *
4 7 L H 5 0* *
5 5 L H 5 0* *
3 2 L H 7 0* *
3 7 L H 7 0* *
4 2 L H 7 0* *
4 7 L H 7 0* *
3 2 L F 2 5* *
3 7 L F 2 5* *
4 2 L F 2 5* *
3 2 L H 4 9* *
3 7 L H 4 9* *
4 2 L H 4 9* *
4 7 L H 4 9* *
3 2 L G 2* * *
3 7 L G 2* * *
4 2 L G 2* * *
1 9 L G 3 1* *
2 2 L G 3 1* *
2 6 L G 3 1* *
32LG33**
37LG33**
42LG33**
32LF51**
42LF51**
47LF51**
1 9 L D 3* *
2 2 L D 3* *
2 6 L D 3* *
3 2 L D 3* *
LED LCD TV MODELS PLASMA TV MODELS
4 2 L H 9 0* *
4 7 L H 9 0* *
5 0 P S 7 0* *
6 0 P S 7 0* *
5 0 P S 8 0* *
6 0 P S 8 0* *
4 2 P Q 3 5* *
5 0 P Q 3 5* *
4 2 P Q 6 5* *
5 0 P S 6 5* *
Please read this manual carefully before operating
your TV.
Retain it for future reference.
Record the model number and serial number of the
TV.
Refer to the label on the back cover and quote this
information.
To your dealer when requiring any service.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition
Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
Use screws 12 mm (+ 0.5/- 0.5) long on the SET assembly side.
(Only 42/47LH70**)
Set assembly side
(with guide spacer)
Set assembly side
(without guide spacer)
12 mm
12 mm
Guide spacer
Wall Mounting Bracket(Separate purchase)
RW120
RW230
(19/22LU50**
/19/22LU40**
/19/22LH20**
/19/22LD3**
/19/22LG31**)
(26LG31**/26LU50**
/32LF25**/32LG2***
/32LG33**
/26/32LH20**
/26/32LD3**/
32LH3***/32LH40**/
32LH49**/32LH50**
/32LH70**/32LF51**)
AW-47LG30M
(32/37/42LF25**
/32/37/42LG2***
/32/37/42LG33**
/32/37/42LH20**
/32LD3**
/32/37/42/47LH3***
/32/37/42/47LH40**
/32/37/42/47LH49**
/32/37/42/47LH50**
/32/37/42/47LH70**
/42/47LH90**
/32/42/47LF51**)
AW-50PG60MS
AW-60PG60MS
(50PS70**/50PS80**
/42/50PQ35**
/42PQ65**/50PS65**)
(60PS70**/60PS80**)
AW-55LH40M
(55LH50**)
ACCESSORIES
Ensure that the following accessories are included with your TV. If an accessory is missing, please contact
the dealer where you purchased the TV.
■
Image shown may differ from your TV.
AV
V
PO
W
ER
MO
DE
PO
W
ER
ON
/O
FF
ENER
GY
TV
/RAD
SAVIN
G
ACCESSORIES
LIS
T
M
UT
E
MAR
K
Q.V
IEW
FA
V
or
or
ME
NU
Q.M
EN
U
RETU
RN
IN
FO
i
/ EX
IT
GU
ID
E
MA
R
FA K
V
RA
TIO
This item is not included for all models.
AVV
MO
DE
* Lightly wipe any stains or
fingerprints on the surface of the TV with the
polishing cloth.
Remote Control
Owner’s Manual
Ferrite Core
(This item is not included for
all models.)
Polishing Cloth Do not use excessive force.
Polishing cloth for This may cause scratching or
use on the screen. discolouration.
Power Cord
Batteries
PLASMA TV models
x2
or
x4
Cable Holder
Protection cover
(Refer to p.33)
(Refer to p.34)
Bolts for stand assembly
(Only 50PS70**/50PS80**/
42/50PQ35**/42PQ65**/50PS65**)
(Refer to p.26)
Cable management clip
(Only 50/60PS70**,
50/60PS80**)
(Refer to p.33)
LCD TV models / LED LCD TV models
Cable management clip
(Only 32/37/42/47LH70**)
(Refer to p.33)
Stand rear cover
(Only 37/42/47LH70**)
(Refer to p.31)
Cable Holder
(Only 19/22LU40**,
19/22/26LU50**)
(Refer to p.32)
Cable management clip
(Only 19/22LH20**,
19/22LD3**,
19/22LG31**)
(Refer to p.32)
1-screw for stand fixing
(Only 26LG31**, 26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**,
32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**,
26/32/37/42LH20**, 26/32LD3**,
32/37/42LH3***, 32/37/42LH40**,
32/37/42LH49**, 32/37/42LH50**,
32/37LH70**, 42LH90**, 32/42LF51**)
(Refer to p.30)
Bolts for stand assembly
(Refer to p. 25 to 28)
x4
(Only 26LG31**,
32/37/42LF25**,
32/37/42LG2***,
32/37/42LG33**,
26/32/37/42LH20**,
26/32LD3**,
32/37/42/47LH3***,
32/37/42/47LH40**,
32/37/42/47LH49**,
32/37/42/47LH50**,
42/47LH90**,
32/42LF51**)
x5
(Only
19/22LU40**)
x4
x2
x3
x8
x7
(Only 26LG31**,
32/37/42LF25**,
32/37/42LG2***,
32/37/42LG33**,
32/42LF51**)
(Only
(Only
19/22LU50**) 26LU50**)
or
M4x20
M4x20
x8
M4x16
x3
M4x20
(Only 32LH70**) (Only 37LH70**) (Only 47LH70**)
x4
M4x16
(Only 42LH70**)
or
Stand Rear Body
Protective Bracket
Cap
Protection Cover
and Bolt for Power Cord
(Only
19/22LU40**) (Except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**) (Only 32/37/42/47LH70**)
(Refer to p.34)
(Refer to p.28)
(Refer to p.33)
USB extension cable
(Only 32/37/42/47LH70**)
Make sure to use the provided
USB extension cable, Which is
specially designed for a slim fit.
1
CONTENTS
ACCESSORIES
............................................
1
PREPARATION
CONTENTS
Front Panel Controls..................................................... 4
Back Panel Information .............................................. 16
Stand Installation ........................................................ 25
Detaching stand .......................................................29
Attaching the TV to a desk .....................................30
Desktop Pedestal Installation............................... 30
Positioning your display ........................................30
Kensington Security System .................................30
Careful installation advice ..................................... 31
Swivel Stand ..................................................................31
To use the stand rear cover ..................................................31
Back Cover for Wire Arrangement.......................... 32
Not Using the desk-type stand ................................34
Wall Mount: Horizontal Installation........................ 35
Antenna Connection .................................................. 36
TO USE A BLUETOOTH
HD Receiver Setup...................................................... 37
DVD Setup .................................................................... 39
VCR Setup..................................................................... 42
Insertion of CI Module .............................................. 44
Digital Audio Out Setup ........................................... 45
Headphone Setup....................................................... 45
Other A/V Source Setup .......................................... 46
Usb Setup...................................................................... 47
PC Setup........................................................................ 48
- Screen Setup for PC Mode................................52
Precautions when using the Bluetooth ................. 88
Setting the Bluetooth ................................................ 89
Set TV PIN .....................................................................90
Bluetooth headset
- Connecting a new Bluetooth headset..............91
- Connecting to Bluetooth headset already
registered.................................................................. 91
- Disconnecting the Bluetooth headset during use....92
- When requesting to connect to TV from the
Bluetooth headset....................................................92
Managing Registered Bluetooth device ................ 93
My Bluetooth Information. ........................................94
Receiving Photos from external Bluetooth device .........95
Listening to the Musics from external Bluetooth device......95
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
TO USE A USB DEVICE
Remote Control Key Functions ............................... 56
Turning on the TV....................................................... 62
Programme Selection ................................................ 62
Volume Adjustment ................................................... 62
Quick Menu ................................................................. 63
On-Screen Menus Selection and Adjustment..... 64
Auto Programme Tuning............................................ 65
Manual Programme Tuning (In Digital Mode)..... 68
When connecting a USB device.............................. 96
Photo List ...................................................................... 97
Music List......................................................................101
Movie List .....................................................................104
DivX Registration Code............................................108
Deactivation.................................................................109
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
2
Manual Programme Tuning (In Analogue Mode)... 70
Programme Edit ........................................................... 72
Booster(In Digital Mode) ...........................................74
Software Update.......................................................... 75
Diagnostics.................................................................... 76
CI Information.............................................................. 77
Selecting the Programme List .................................. 78
Favourite Programme Setup...................................... 79
Input List ....................................................................... 80
Data Service...............................................................81
Input Label .................................................................... 81
Simple Manual.............................................................. 82
................................................................. 83
AV Mode........................................................................ 86
Initializing (Reset to original factory settings) .....87
EPG (ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME
GUIDE) (IN DIGITAL MODE)
PICTURE CONTROL
Picture Size (Aspect Ratio) Control ..................... 113
Picture Wizard ..............................................................115
Energy Saving ...............................................................116
Preset Picture Settings
- Picture Mode-Preset .......................................... 117
Manual Picture Adjustment
- Picture Mode-User option................................ 118
Picture Improvement Technology.......................... 119
Expert Picture Control............................................. 120
Picture Reset............................................................... 123
LED Local dimming ..................................................123
Power Indicator............................................................124
Image Sticking Minimization (ISM) Method...... 125
Demo Mode................................................................ 126
Mode Setting ...............................................................127
TIME SETTING
CONTENTS
Switch on/off EPG..................................................... 110
Select a Programme................................................... 110
Button Function in NOW/NEXT Guide Mode...... 110
Button Function in 8 Day Guide Mode.................111
Button Function in Date Change Mode............... 111
Button Function in Extended Description Box ....... 112
Button Function in Record/Remind Setting Mode........ 112
Button Function in Schedule List Mode .............. 112
I/II
- Stereo/Dual Reception (In Analogue Mode Only) 137
- NICAM Reception (In Analogue Mode Only) ... 138
- Speaker Sound Output Selection.................. 138
On-Screen Menu Language/Country Selection.... 139
Language Selection (In Digital Mode only)....... 140
Clock Setup................................................................. 141
Auto On/ Off Time Setting .................................... 142
Sleep Timer Setting .................................................. 143
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS
Set Password & Lock System................................. 144
Block Programme....................................................... 145
Parental Control (In Digital Mode only)............. 146
External Input Blocking.............................................147
Key Lock ...................................................................... 148
TELETEXT
Switch on/off ............................................................. 149
SIMPLE Text ................................................................ 149
TOP Text...................................................................... 149
FASTEXT...................................................................... 150
Special Teletext Functions ...................................... 150
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
DIGITAL TELETEXT
Auto Volume Leveler................................................. 128
Clear Voice II................................................................129
Preset Sound Settings - Sound Mode .............. 130
Sound Setting Adjustment -User Mode............131
SRS TruSurround XT............................................. 131
Balance .................................................................... 132
TV Speakers On/ Off Setup ................................132
DTV Audio setting (In Digital Mode only) . .133
Selecting Digital Audio Out.................................134
Audio Reset..............................................................135
Audio Description (In Digital Mode only)........136
Teletext within Digital Service ................................ 151
Teletext in Digital Service........................................ 151
APPENDIX
Troubleshooting......................................................... 152
Maintenance .............................................................. 154
Product Specifications ............................................. 155
IR Codes ...................................................................... 169
External Control Device Setup .............................. 170
3
PREPARATION
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS
! NOTE
G
PREPARATION
■
TV can be placed in standby mode in order to reduce the power consumption. And TV should be
switched off using the power switch on the TV if it will not be watched for some time, as this will
reduce energy consumption.
The energy consumed during use can be significantly reduced if the level of brightness of the picture is
reduced, and this will reduce the overall running cost.
Image shown may differ from your TV.
Plasma TV Models
CAUTION
When the TV cannot be turned on with the remote control, press the main power button on the TV.
(When the power is turned off with the main power button on the TV, it will not be turned on with the
remote control).
G Do not step on the glass stand or subject it to any impact.
It may break, causing possible injury from fragments of glass, or the TV may fall.
G Do not drag the TV. The floor or the product may be damaged.
G
50/60PS70**
PROGRAMME
VOLUME
OK
MENU
Intelligent Sensor
Adjusts picture
according to the surrounding conditions.
Remote Control
Sensor
Power/Standby Indicator
• Illuminates red in standby mode.
• The LED is off while the TV remains on.
4
INPUT
POWER
50/60PS80**
PREPARATION
PROGRAMME
VOLUME
OK
MENU
Intelligent Sensor
Adjusts picture
according to the surrounding conditions.
Remote Control
Sensor
INPUT
POWER
Power/Standby Indicator
• Illuminates red in standby mode.
• The LED is off while the TV remains on.
5
PREPARATION
42/50PQ35**
PREPARATION
Remote Control
Sensor
Intelligent Sensor
Adjusts picture according
to the surrounding
conditions.
Power/Standby Indicator
• Illuminates red in standby mode.
• Illuminates blue when the TV is switched on.
MENU
INPUT
MENU
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
MENU
INPUT
6
OK
MENU
OK
P
OK
POWER
P
MENU
OK
VOLUME
OK
P
P
POWER
PROGRAMME
POWER
POWER
P
PROGRAMME
PREPARATION
T
42PQ65**, 50PS65**
P
VOLUME
OK
OK
Remote Control
Sensor
Intelligent Sensor
Adjusts picture according to the surrounding
conditions
Power/Standby Indicator
• Illuminates red in standby mode.
• The LED is off while the TV remains on.
MENU
OK
P
MENU
MENU
INPUT
INPUT
POWER
POWER
7
PREPARATION
LED LCD TV Models : 42/47LH90**
PREPARATION
P
PROGRAMME
VOLUME
OK
OK
MENU
MENU
INPUT
POWER
SPEAKER
Remote Control Sensor
Intelligent Sensor
Adjusts picture according to
the surrounding conditions.
Power/Standby Indicator
• Illuminates red in standby mode.
• Illuminates white when the TV is switched on.
Note: You can turn the P o w e r I n d i c a t o r on
or off in the OPTION menu.
8
INPUT
Main Power Switch
LCD TV Models : 19/22LU40**
VOLUME
OK
OK
MENU INPUT
Power/Standby
Indicator
• illuminates red in
standby mode.
• The LED is off
while the TV
remains on.
PREPARATION
P
PROGRAMME
MENU
INPUT
POWER
Remote Control Sensor
Main
Power
Switch
9
PREPARATION
LCD TV Models : 32/37/42/47LH70**
P
P
PREPARATION
P
VOLUME
Intelligent Sensor
Adjusts picture according to
the surrounding conditions
Remote Control Sensor
OK
OK
MENU
MENU
Moving LED
INPUT
INPUT
POWER(Touch Sensor)
Power/Standby Indicator
• Illuminates red in standby mode.
• Illuminates whitish when the TV is switched on.
Note: You can adjust P o w e r I n d i c a t o r in the
OPTION menu.
Main Power Switch
10
PROGRAMME
LCD TV Models : 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 19/22/26/32LD3**,
32/37/42/47LH3***
(Only 19/22/26LH20**, 19/22/26LD3**)
POWER INPUT MENU OK
OK
PROGRAMME
P
(Only 32/37/42LH20**, 32LD3**,
32/37/42/47LH3***)
P
PREPARATION
INPUT MENU
VOLUME
PROGRAMME
VOLUME
OK
Remote Control Sensor
OK
MENU
MENU
INPUT
INPUT
POWER
Power/Standby Indicator
Illuminates red in standby mode.
Illuminates blue when the TV is switched on.
Main Power Switch
11
PREPARATION
LCD TV Models : 32/37/42/47LH40**, 32/37/42/47LH49**,
32/37/42/47/55LH50**
PREPARATION
PROGRAMME
P
VOLUME
OK
OK
MENU
MENU
INPUT
INPUT
Remote Control Sensor
Intelligent Sensor
Adjusts picture according to
the surrounding conditions.
Power/Standby Indicator
• Illuminates red in standby mode.
• Illuminates blue when the TV is switched on.
12
Main Power Switch
POWER
LCD TV Models : 19/22/26LU50**
(Only 19/22LU50**)
POWER INPUT MENU
OK
VOLUME
PROGRAMME
PREPARATION
INPUT MENU
OK
P
P
(Only 26LU50**)
P
PROGRAMME
P
VOLUME
OK
OK
P
MENU
MENU
INPUT
INPUT
POWER
Remote Control Sensor
Main
Power
Switch
Power/Standby Indicator
Illuminates red in standby mode.
Illuminates white when the TV is switched on.
13
PREPARATION
LCD TV Models : 19/22LG31**
PREPARATION
INPUT
MENU
VOLUME
OK
INPUT MENU OK
-
PROGRAMME
+
-
P
+
POWER
Remote Control Sensor
Power/Standby Indicator
• illuminates red in standby mode.
• illuminates blue when the TV is switched on.
14
LCD TV Models : 32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**,
26LG31**, 32/42/47LF51**
PROGRAMME
PREPARATION
P
+
VOLUME
-
OK
OK
MENU
MENU
POWER
Remote Control Sensor
Power/Standby Indicator
• illuminates red in standby mode.
• illuminates blue when the TV is switched on.
INPUT
INPUT
Intelligent Sensor
Adjusts picture according to the surrounding
conditions. (32/42/47LF51** only)
15
PREPARATION
BACK PANEL INFORMATION
A
Image shown may differ from your TV.
Plasma TV Models : 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**
PREPARATION
10
1
11
2
3
4
5
2
12
6
9
8
1
Power Cord Socket
This TV operates on an AC power. The voltage is
indicated on the Specifications page.(G p.155 to
167) Never attempt to operate the TV on DC power.
7
RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) PORT
Connect to the RS-232C port on a PC.
This port is used for Service or Hotel mode.
2
HDMI/DVI IN Input
Connect an HDMI signal to HDMI IN.
Or DVI(VIDEO)signal to HDMI/DVI port with DVI
to HDMI cable.
8
Euro Scart Socket (AV1/AV2)
Connect scart socket input or output from an
external device to these jacks.
9
3
RGB/DVI Audio Input
Connect the audio from a PC or DTV.
Antenna Input
Connect antenna or cable to this jack.
10
OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
Connect digital audio to various types of equipment.
Connect to a Digital Audio Component.
Use an Optical audio cable.
PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory Card
International Association) Card Slot
Insert the CI Module to P C M C I A C A R D S L O T .
(This feature is not available in all countries.)
11
USB Input
Connect USB storage device to this jack.
4
5
6
16
7
Component Input
Connect a component video/audio device to
these jacks.
RGB IN Input
Connect the output from a PC.
12
S-Video Input
Connect S-Video out from an S-VIDEO device.
Audio/Video Input
Connect audio/video output from an external
device to these jacks.
HDMI
VIDEO L/MONO AUDIO R S-VIDEO
Plasma TV Models : 42/50PQ35**, 42PQ65**, 50PS65**
R
AV IN 3
10
4
HDMI IN 3
3
2
1
VARIABLE AUDIO OUT
HDMI/DVI IN
5
1
6
7
Power Cord Socket
This TV operates on an AC power. The voltage is
indicated on the Specifications page. (G p.155 to
167) Never attempt to operate the TV on DC
power.
2
RGB/DVI Audio Input
Connect the audio from a PC or DTV.
3
OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
Connect digital audio to various types of equipment.
Connect to a Digital Audio Component.
Use an Optical audio cable.
4
5
VIDEO L/MONO AUDIO R S-VIDEO
HDMI IN
Euro Scart Socket (AV1/AV2)
Connect scart socket input or output from an
external device to these jacks.
5
HDMI/DVI IN Input
Connect an HDMI signal to HDMI IN. Or DVI (VIDEO)
signal to HDMI/DVI port with DVI to HDMI cable.
6
RGB IN Input
Connect the output from a PC.
8
USB IN
SERVICE ONLY
11
2
PREPARATION
1
12
AV IN 3
9
7
RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) PORT
Connect to the RS-232C port on a PC.
This port is used for Service or Hotel mode.
8
Component Input
Connect a component video/audio device to
these jacks.
9
Antenna Input
Connect RF antenna to this jack.
10
PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory Card
International Association) Card Slot
Insert the CI Module to P C M C I A C A R D S L O T .
(This feature is not available in all countries.)
11
USB Input
Connect USB storage device to this jack.
12
S-Video Input
Connect S-Video out from an S-VIDEO device.
Audio/Video Input
Connect audio/video output from an external
device to these jacks.
17
HDMI
IN 2
VIDEO L/MONO AUDIO R
PREPARATION
LCD TV Models : 32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**,
19/22/26LG31**
(Only 32/37/42LG2***,
32/37/42LG33**,
26LG31**)
AV IN(Only
3 32/37/42LF25**) (Only 19/22LG31**)
H/P
PREPARATION
10
13
3
1
10
5
12
4
HDMI
IN 2
2
10
(RGB)
USB IN
SERVICE ONLY
HDMI
IN 2
VIDEO L/MONO AUDIO R
5
H/P
11
12
H/P
AV IN 3
HDMI
/ DVI IN 1
12
ANTENNA IN
5
7
8
9
1
Power Cord Socket
This TV operates on an AC power. The voltage is
indicated on the Specifications page.(G p.155 to
167) Never attempt to operate the TV on DC power.
7
RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) PORT
Connect to the RS-232C port on a PC.
This port is used for Service or Hotel mode.
2
RGB/DVI Audio Input
Connect the audio from a PC or DTV.
8
Component Input
Connect a component video/audio device to
these jacks.
3
OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
Connect digital audio to various types of equipment.
Connect to a Digital Audio Component.
Use an Optical audio cable.
9
Antenna Input
Connect antenna or cable to this jack.
4
Euro Scart Socket (AV1/AV2)
Connect scart socket input or output from an
external device to these jacks.
5
HDMI/DVI IN Input
Connect an HDMI signal to HDMI IN. Or DVI
(VIDEO) signal to HDMI/DVI port with DVI to HDMI
cable.
6
18
6
H/P
RGB IN Input
Connect the output from a PC.
10
PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory Card
International Association) Card Slot
Insert the CI Module to P C M C I A C A R D S L O T .
(This feature is not available in all countries.)
11
Audio/Video Input
Connect audio/video output from an external
device to these jacks.
12
Headphone Socket
Plug the headphone into the headphone socket.
13
SERVICE ONLY PORT
VIDEO L/MONO AUDIO R
ON
LCD TV Models : 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**
H/P
OFF
AV IN 3
(Only 26LU50**)
1
VIDEO L/MONO AUDIO R
HDMI
IN 3
H/P
ON
OFF
ON
1
H/P
H/P
OFF
10
AV IN 3
(Only 19/22LU40**)
(Only 19/22/26LU50**)
2
12
4
3
ON ON
2
OFFOFF
1(DVI)
HDMI
IN 3
HDMI
IN 3
(RGB)
USB IN
SERVICE ONLY
5
VIDEO L/MONO AUDIO R
VIDEO L/MONO AUDIO R
11
13
AVAV
IN IN
3 3
HDMI / DVI IN
ANTENNA IN
6
7
8
1
Power Cord Socket
This TV operates on an AC power. The voltage is
indicated on the Specifications page.(G p.155 to
167) Never attempt to operate the TV on DC power.
2
RGB/DVI Audio Input
Connect the audio from a PC or DTV.
3
OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
Connect digital audio to various types of equipment.
Connect to a Digital Audio Component.
Use an Optical audio cable.
4
Euro Scart Socket (AV1/AV2)
Connect scart socket input or output from an
external device to these jacks.
5
HDMI/DVI IN Input
Connect an HDMI signal to HDMI IN. Or DVI
(VIDEO) signal to HDMI/DVI port with DVI to HDMI
cable.
6
7
10
H/PH/P
COMPONENT IN
5
PREPARATION
11
H/P
9
8
Component Input
Connect a component video/audio device to
these jacks.
9
Antenna Input
Connect antenna or cable to this jack.
10
Headphone Socket
Plug the headphone into the headphone socket.
11
PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory Card
International Association) Card Slot
Insert the CI Module to P C M C I A C A R D S L O T .
(This feature is not available in all countries.)
12
SERVICE ONLY PORT
13
Audio/Video Input
Connect audio/video output from an external
device to these jacks.
RGB Input
Connect the output from a PC.
RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) PORT
Connect to the RS-232C port on a PC.
This port is used for Service or Hotel mode.
19
PREPARATION
LCD TV Models : 32/37/42/47LH70**
PREPARATION
2
12
3
4
5
6
1
7
(RGB)
8
1
20
9
Power Cord Socket
This TV operates on an AC power. The voltage is
indicated on the Specifications page.(G p.155 to
167) Never attempt to operate the TV on DC power.
2
USB Input
Connect USB storage device to this jack.
3
HDMI/DVI IN Input
Connect an HDMI signal to HDMI IN.
Or DVI(VIDEO)signal to HDMI/DVI port with DVI
to HDMI cable.
4
S-Video Input
Connect S-Video out from an S-VIDEO device.
Audio/Video Input
Connect audio/video output from an external
device to these jacks.
5
RGB IN Input
Connect the output from a PC.
RGB/DVI Audio Input
Connect the audio from a PC or DTV.
6
RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) PORT
Connect to the RS-232C port on a PC.
This port is used for Service or Hotel mode.
10
11
7
Antenna Input
Connect antenna or cable to this jack.
8
Component Input
Connect a component video/audio device to
these jacks.
9
OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
Connect digital audio to various types of equipment.
Connect to a Digital Audio Component.
Use an Optical audio cable.
10
Euro Scart Socket (AV1/AV2)
Connect scart socket input or output from an
external device to these jacks.
11
Headphone Socket
Plug the headphone into the headphone socket.
12
PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory Card
International Association) Card Slot
Insert the CI Module to P C M C I A C A R D S L O T .
(This feature is not available in all countries.)
HDMI
IN 3
VIDEO L/MONO AUDIO R
HDMI
IN 3
USB IN VIDEO L/MONO AUDIO R
SERVICE ONLY
VIDEO L/MONO AUDIO R
AV IN 3
LCD TV Models : 32/37/42/47LH40**, 32/37/42/47LH49**,
32/37/42/47/55LH50**, 32/42/47LF51**
H/P32/42/47LF51**)
(Only
(Only 32/37/42/47/55LH50**,
(Only
32/37/42/47LH40**) 32/37/42/47LH49**)
10 AV IN 3
AV IN 3
H/P
(Only 32/42/47LF51**)
11
11
11
1
(Only 32/37/42/47/55LH50**,
32/37/42/47LH49**)
PREPARATION
H/P
1
10
14
HDMI / DVI IN
AV IN 3
1(DVI)
H/P
5
6
7
8
1
Power Cord Socket
This TV operates on an AC power. The voltage is
indicated on the Specifications page.(G p.155 to
167) Never attempt to operate the TV on DC power.
2
RGB/DVI Audio Input
Connect the audio from a PC or DTV.
3
OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
Connect digital audio to various types of equipment.
Connect to a Digital Audio Component.
Use an Optical audio cable.
4
5
6
HDMI
IN 3
HDMI
IN 3
12
AV IN 3
AV IN 3
ANTENNA IN
VIDEO L/MONO AUDIO R
2
HDMI
IN 4
HDMI / DVI IN
12
VIDEO L/MONO AUDIO R
5
5
5
L/MONO
MONO AUDIO R
VIDEO L/
(RGB)
HDMI
IN 3
1(DVI)
L/MONO
MONO AUDIO R
VIDEO L/
2
HDMI
IN 3
4
3
VIDEO L/MONO AUDIO R
2
3
AV IN 3
13
13
H/P
12
AV IN 3
13
H/P
H/P
H/P
9
7
RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) PORT
Connect to the RS-232C port on a PC.
This port is used for Service or Hotel mode.
8
Component Input
Connect a component video/audio device to
these jacks.
9
Antenna Input
Connect antenna or cable to this jack.
10
USB Input
Connect USB storage device to this jack.
11
HDMI/DVI IN Input
Connect an HDMI signal to HDMI IN. Or DVI
(VIDEO) signal to HDMI/DVI port with DVI to HDMI
cable.
PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory Card
International Association) Card Slot
Insert the CI Module to P C M C I A C A R D S L O T .
(This feature is not available in all countries.)
12
Audio/Video Input
Connect audio/video output from an external
device to these jacks.
RGB IN Input
Connect the output from a PC.
13
Headphone Socket
Plug the headphone into the headphone socket.
14
SERVICE ONLY PORT
Euro Scart Socket (AV1/AV2)
Connect scart socket input or output from an
external device to these jacks.
5
21
VIDEO L/MONO AUDIO R
HDMI
IN 4
PREPARATION
LED LCD TV Models : 42/47LH90**
10
AV IN 3
PREPARATION
H/P
11
1
(RGB)
HDMI / DVI IN
3
2
HDMI
IN 4
4
3
5
VIDEO L/MONO AUDIO R
2
12
AV IN 3
13
1(DVI)
ANTENNA IN
5
7
8
9
1
Power Cord Socket
This TV operates on an AC power. The voltage is
indicated on the Specifications page.(G p.155 to
167) Never attempt to operate the TV on DC power.
7
RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) PORT
Connect to the RS-232C port on a PC.
This port is used for Service or Hotel mode.
2
RGB/DVI Audio Input
Connect the audio from a PC or DTV.
8
Component Input
Connect a component video/audio device to
these jacks.
3
OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
Connect digital audio to various types of equipment.
Connect to a Digital Audio Component.
Use an Optical audio cable.
9
Antenna Input
Connect antenna or cable to this jack.
10
USB Input
Connect USB storage device to this jack.
11
PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory Card
International Association) Card Slot
Insert the CI Module to P C M C I A C A R D S L O T .
(This feature is not available in all countries.)
12
Audio/Video Input
Connect audio/video output from an external
device to these jacks.
13
Headphone Socket
Plug the headphone into the headphone socket.
4
5
6
22
6
H/P
Euro Scart Socket (AV1/AV2)
Connect scart socket input or output from an
external device to these jacks.
HDMI/DVI IN Input
Connect an HDMI signal to HDMI IN. Or DVI
(VIDEO) signal to HDMI/DVI port with DVI to HDMI
cable.
RGB IN Input
Connect the output from a PC.
VIDEO L/MONO AUDIO R
HDMI
IN 2
H/P
LCD TV Models : 26/32/37/42LH20**, 26/32LD3**, 32/37/42/47LH3***
(Only 32/37/42/47LH3***)
(Only 26/32/37/42LH20**,
26/32LD3**)
AV IN 3
(Only 32/37/42/47LH3***)
USB IN
SERVICE ONLY
10
2
10
1
HDMI
/ DVI IN 1
PREPARATION
HDMI
H/P
5
VIDEO L/MONO AUDIO R
5
(RGB)
USB IN
SERVICE ONLY
11
AV IN 3
HDMI
/ DVI IN 1
HDMI
IN 2
4
3
HDMI
IN 3
2
5
VIDEO L/MONO AUDIO R
13
11
AV IN 3
12
ANTENNA IN
5
6
7
8
H/P
12
H/P
9
1
Power Cord Socket
This TV operates on an AC power. The voltage is
indicated on the Specifications page.(G p.155 to
167) Never attempt to operate the TV on DC power.
7
RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) PORT
Connect to the RS-232C port on a PC.
This port is used for Service or Hotel mode.
2
RGB/DVI Audio Input
Connect the audio from a PC or DTV.
8
Component Input
Connect a component video/audio device to
these jacks.
3
OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
Connect digital audio to various types of equipment.
Connect to a Digital Audio Component.
Use an Optical audio cable.
9
Antenna Input
Connect antenna or cable to this jack.
4
5
6
10
Euro Scart Socket (AV1/AV2)
Connect scart socket input or output from an
external device to these jacks.
HDMI/DVI IN Input
Connect an HDMI signal to HDMI IN. Or DVI
(VIDEO) signal to HDMI/DVI port with DVI to HDMI
cable.
PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory Card
International Association) Card Slot
Insert the CI Module to P C M C I A C A R D S L O T .
(This feature is not available in all countries.)
11
Audio/Video Input
Connect audio/video output from an external
device to these jacks.
12
Headphone Socket
Plug the headphone into the headphone socket.
13
SERVICE ONLY PORT
RGB IN Input
Connect the output from a PC.
23
H/P
PREPARATION
LCD TV Models : 19/22LH20**, 19/22LD3**
PREPARATION
11
1
2
12
3
4
10
COMPONENT IN
USB IN
SERVICE ONLY
H/P
(RGB)
RGB IN (PC)
HDMI / DVI IN
ANTENNA IN
5
7
8
9
Power Cord Socket
This TV operates on an AC power. The voltage is
indicated on the Specifications page.(G p.155 to
167) Never attempt to operate the TV on DC power.
RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) PORT
Connect to the RS-232C port on a PC.
This port is used for Service or Hotel mode.
2
RGB/DVI Audio Input
Connect the audio from a PC or DTV.
8
Component Input
Connect a component video/audio device to
these jacks.
3
OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
Connect digital audio to various types of equipment.
Connect to a Digital Audio Component.
Use an Optical audio cable.
9
Antenna Input
Connect antenna or cable to this jack.
10
Headphone Socket
Plug the headphone into the headphone socket.
11
PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory Card
International Association) Card Slot
Insert the CI Module to P C M C I A C A R D S L O T .
(This feature is not available in all countries.)
12
SERVICE ONLY PORT
4
5
6
24
6
7
1
Euro Scart Socket (AV1/AV2)
Connect scart socket input or output from an
external device to these jacks.
HDMI/DVI IN Input
Connect an HDMI signal to HDMI IN. Or DVI
(VIDEO) signal to HDMI/DVI port with DVI to HDMI
cable.
RGB IN Input
Connect the output from a PC.
STAND INSTALLATION
■
Image shown may differ from your TV
When assembling the desk type stand, check whether the bolt is fully tightened. (If not tightened fully, the product can
tilt forward after the product installation.) If you tighten the bolt with excessive force, the bolt can deviate from abrasion
of the tightening part of the bolt.
1
2
Carefully place the TV screen side down on a cushioned surface to protect the screen from damage.
Assemble the parts of the S t a n d B o d y with
the S t a n d B a s e of the TV.
32LH70**
Only 26/32/37/42LH20**, 26/32LD3**,
32/37/42/47LH3***, 32/37/42/47LH40**,
32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47LH50**,
42/47LH90**
1
Carefully place the TV screen side down on a cushioned
surface to protect the screen from damage.
2
Assemble the TV as shown.
3
Fix the 4 bolts securely using the holes in the
back of the TV.
PREPARATION
Only 32/37/42/47LH70**
47LH70** 37LH70**
Stand Body
M4x20
M4x16
M4x20
Stand Base
42LH70**
M4x20
Stand Body
Stand Base
3
Assemble the TV as shown.
4
Fix the 4 bolts securely using the holes in the
back of the TV.
32/37LH70**
M4x20
42/47LH70**
M4x16
25
PREPARATION
Only 50PS70**/50PS80**/
42/50PQ35**/42PQ65**/50PS65**
1
Carefully place the TV screen side down on a cushioned surface to protect the screen from damage.
1
Carefully place the TV screen side down on a cushioned
surface to protect the screen from damage.
2
Assemble the TV as shown.
2
Assemble the TV as shown.
3
Fix the 4 bolts securely using the holes in the
back of the TV.
PREPARATION
Only 19/22LH20**, 19/22LD3**
Cover Base
When assembling the
stand, make sure to
distinguish and
assemble the front
and rear side of the
stand correctly.
Front
26
Only 19/22LG31**
1
Carefully place the TV screen side down on a cushioned surface to protect the screen from damage.
1
Carefully place the TV screen side down on a
cushioned surface to protect the screen from
damage.
2
Fix the 2 or 3 bolts securely using the holes.
2
Assemble the parts of the S t a n d B o d y with
C o v e r B a s e of the TV. Insert the S t a n d
B o d y into a C o v e r B a s e until clicking sound.
PREPARATION
Only 19/22/26LU50**
Stand Body
(Only 26LU50**)
Cover Base
3
Assemble the TV as shown.
27
PREPARATION
Only 32/37/42LF25**,
Only 19/22LU40**
32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**,
place the TV screen side down on a cush1 Carefully
26LG31**, 32/42LF51**
ioned surface to protect the screen from damage.
1
Carefully place the TV screen side down on a
cushioned surface to protect the screen from
damage.
PREPARATION
2
2
Fix the 3 bolts securely using the holes in the
C o v e r B a s e.
Assemble the parts of the S t a n d B o d y with
the C o v e r B a s e of the TV.
Cover Base
Stand Body
3
Assemble the parts of the S t a n d R e a r B o d y
with the TV.
Cover Base
3
Assemble the TV as shown.
Stand Rear Body
4
4
Assemble the parts of the C a p with the S t a n d
R e a r B o d y of the TV.
Fix the 4 bolts securely using the holes in the
back of the TV.
Cap
Stand Rear Body
28
DETACHING STAND
■
Image shown may differ from your TV.
Only 19/22LU40**
Only 19/22/26LU50**
Carefully place the TV screen side down on a cushioned surface to protect the screen from damage.
2
Detach the C a p from TV.
Press in the direction of the arrow to detach the
cap.
1
Carefully place the TV screen side down on a cushioned surface to protect the screen from damage.
2
Loose the bolts and then detach the stand from TV.
PREPARATION
1
Cap
3
Loose the bolts and then detach the S t a n d
R e a r B o d y from TV.
(Only 26LU50**)
3
Cover Base
Stand Rear Body
4
Loose the bolts from TV.
Detach the C o v e r B a s e from T V.
(Only 26LU50**)
Loose the bolts and then detach the C o v e r
B a s e from TV.
4
Detach the S t a n d B o d y from T V.
Stand Body
Cover Base
5
Loose the bolts and then detach the S t a n d
B o d y from TV.
Stand Body
29
PREPARATION
ATTACHING THE TV TO A DESK
(Only 26LG31**, 26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**,
32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, 26/32/37/42LH20**,
26/32LD3**, 32/37/42LH3***, 32/37/42LH40**,
32/37/42LH49**, 32/37/42LH50**, 32/37LH70**,
42LH90**, 32/42LF51**)
POSITIONING YOUR DISPLAY
(Only 19/22LH20**, 19/22LD3**, 19/22LG31**)
■
Image shown may differ from your TV.
Adjust the position of the panel in various ways for
maximum comfort.
• Tilt range
■
PREPARATION
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
The TV must be attached to desk so it cannot be
pulled in a forward/backward direction, potentially
causing injury or damaging the product. Use only an
attached screw.
12
0
0
3
! NOTE
G
1-Screw
(provided as parts of the product)
Stand
The following model is a fixed stand type model
without the Tilt and Swivel features so excessive
pressure may damage the set.
-19/22/26LU50**, 19/22LU40**
KENSINGTON
SECURITY SYSTEM
This feature is not available for all models.
■
■
Desk
! WARNING
G
To prevent TV from falling over, the TV should
be securely attached to the floor/wall per
installation instructions. Tipping, shaking, or
rocking the machine may cause injury.
DESKTOP PEDESTALINSTALLATION
For adequate ventilation allow a clearance of 10cm
all around the TV.
10 cm
10 cm
30
10 cm
10 cm
Image shown may differ from your TV.
The TV is equipped with a Kensington Security
System connector on the back panel. Connect the
Kensington Security System cable as shown below.
For the detailed installation and use of the Kensington
Security System, refer to the user’s guide provided
with the Kensington Security System.
For further information, contact http://www.kensington.com, the internet homepage of the Kensington
company. Kensington sells security systems for expensive electronic equipment such as notebook PCs and LCD projectors.
NOTE
- The Kensington Security System is an optional accessory.
NOTES
a. If the TV feels cold to the touch, there may be a
small “flicker” when it is turned on.
This is normal, there is nothing wrong with TV.
b. Some minute dot defects may be visible on the
screen, appearing as tiny red, green, or blue spots.
However, they have no adverse effect on the monitor's performance.
c. Avoid touching the LCD screen or holding your finger(s)
against it for long periods of time.
Doing so may produce some temporary distortion
effects on the screen.
CAREFUL INSTALLATION ADVICE
(Except for 19/22LH20**, 19/22LD3**,
19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**,19/22LG31**)
■
Image shown may differ from your TV.
After installing the TV, you can adjust the TV set
manually to the left or right direction by 20 degrees
to suit your viewing position.
PREPARATION
You should purchase necessary components to fix the TV
safety and secure to the wall on the market.
A Position the TV close to the wall to avoid the possibility
of it falling when pushed.
A The instructions shown below are a safer way to set up
the TV, by fixing it to the wall, avoiding the possibility of
it falling forwards if pulled. This will prevent the TV from
falling forward and causing injury. This will also prevent
the TV from damage. Ensure that children do not climb
or hang from the TV.
A
SWIVEL STAND
1
1
2
2
TO USE THE STAND REAR
COVER (Only 37/42/47LH70**)
1
Use the eye-bolts or TV brackets/bolts to fix the
product to the wall as shown in the picture.
(If your TV has bolts in the eyebolts, loosen then
bolts.)
* Insert the eye-bolts or TV brackets/bolts and tighten them securely in the upper holes.
2
Secure the wall brackets with the bolts on the wall.
Match the height of the bracket that is mounted on
the wall.
■
Image shown may differ from your TV.
Install the S t a n d R e a r C o v e r as shown.
Stand Rear Cover
3
Grip the knob in your fingers and pull it.
3
Use a sturdy rope to tie the product for alignment. It
is safer to tie the rope so it becomes horizontal
between the wall and the product.
! NOTE
G
G
G
When moving the TV undo the cords first.
Use a platform or cabinet strong and large enough
to support the size and weight of the TV.
To use the TV safely make sure that the height of the
bracket on the wall and on the TV is the same.
31
PREPARATION
BACK COVER FOR WIRE ARRANGEMENT
■
Image shown may differ from your TV.
LCD TV Models : 19/22LH20**,
19/22LD3**, 19/22LG31**
PREPARATION
1
2
Connect the cables as necessary.
To connect additional equipment,
see the External Equipment
Setup section.
LCD TV Models / LED LCD TV Models :
32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***,
32/37/42LG33**, 26LG31**,
26/32/37/42LH20**, 26/32LD3**,
32/37/42/47LH3***, 32/37/42/47LH40**,
32/37/42/47LH49**,
32/37/42/47/55LH50**, 42/47LH90**,
32/42/47LF51**
1
Connect the cables as necessary.
To connect additional equipment,
see the External Equipment
Setup section.
2
Open the Cable Management Clip as shown.
Install the Cable Management Clip as shown.
Cable Management Clip
3
Fit the Cable Management Clip as shown.
Cable Management Clip
3
Fit the Cable Management Clip as shown.
How to remove the cable management
clip (LCD TV Models : 19/22LH20**, 19/22LD3**, LCD TV Models :
19/22LG31**)
Hold the Cable Management Clip
with both hands and pull it backward.
! NOTE
not use the Cable Management Clip to lift the
TV.
- If the TV is dropped, you may be injured or the
TV may be damaged.
G Do
32
19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**
After Connecting the cables as necessary, install
Cable Holder as shown and bundle the cables.
LCD TV Models : 32/37/42/47LH70**
Align the hole with the tab on the Cable
Management Clip.
Turn the Cable Management Clip as shown.
Note : that excessive force might cause damage to
the product when using Cable Management clip.
1
Plasma TV Models : 42/50PQ35**,
42PQ65**, 50PS65**
After Connecting the cables as necessary, install
Cable Holder as shown and bundle the cables.
Plasma TV Models : 50/60PS70**,
50/60PS80**
1
PREPARATION
Cable Holder
After Connecting the cables as necessary, install
Cable Holder as shown and bundle the cables. To
connect additional equipment, see the E x t e r n a l
E q u i p m e n t S e t u p section.
Cable Management Clip
Connect the cables as necessary.
To connect additional equipment, see the
E x t e r n a l E q u i p m e n t S e t u p section.
2
Cable Holder
2
Install the Cable Management Clip as shown.
How to secure the power cable
(Only 32/37/42/47LH70**)
1
Secure the power cable with the Protective Bracket
and the bolt as shown. It will help prevent the power
cable from being removed by accident.
Bolt
Cable Management Clip
How to remove the cable management clip (Only 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**)
Hold the Cable Management Clip with both hands
and pull it upward.
Protective Bracket
! NOTE
G
Do not use the Cable Management Clip to lift the TV.
- If the TV is dropped, you may be injured or the TV may be damaged.
33
PREPARATION
NOT USING THE DESK-TYPE STAND
(Except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**)
■
Image shown may differ from your TV.
When installing the wall-mounted unit, use the protection cover.
Only 19/22LH20**, 19/22LD3**, 19/22LG31**
Plasma TV models
PREPARATION
1
Carefully place the TV screen side down on a
cushioned surface to protect the screen from
damage.
2
Loose the bolts from TV.
3
Detach the stand from TV.
4
Insert the P r o t e c t i o n C o v e r into the TV.
Protection Cover
Insert the P r o t e c t i o n C o v e r into the TV until clicking
sound.
LCD TV models / LED LCD TV Models
Only 32/37/42/47LH70**, 42/47LH90**
Protection Cover
After removing the protection paper
from the protection cover, adhere it
to the TV as shown.
Only 26/32/37/42LH20**, 26/32LD3**,
32/37/42/47LH3***, 32/37/42/47LH40**,
32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47/55LH50**
Insert the P r o t e c t i o n
C o v e r into the TV until
Protection Cover
clicking sound.
Only 32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***,
32/37/42LG33**, 26LG31**, 32/42/47LF51**
34
Insert the P r o t e c t i o n
C o v e r into the TV until
clicking sound.
Protection Cover
Protection Cover
5
Fix the 4 bolts securely using the holes in the
back of the TV.
A The TV can be installed in various ways such as on
a wall, or on a desktop etc.
A The TV is designed to be mounted horizontally.
A
B
EARTHING
Power Supply
Circuit breaker
WALL MOUNT: HORIZONTAL
INSTALLATION
We recommend the use of a LG Brand wall mounting
bracket when mounting the TV to a wall.
A We recommend that you purchase a wall mounting
bracket which supports VESA standard.
A LG recommends that wall mounting be performed by a
qualified professional installer.
A First you connect the USB extension cable to the USB
IN terminal, and then hang it on the wall. (Only
32/37/42/47LH70**)
A
! NOTE
Should Install wall mount on a solid wall perpendicular to
the floor.
G Should use a special wall mount, if you want to install it to
ceiling or slanted wall.
G The surface that wall mount is to be mounted on should
be of sufficient strength to support the weight of TV set;
e.g. concrete, natural rock, brick and hollow block.
G Installing screw type and length depends on the wall
mount used. Further information, refer to the instructions
included with the mount.
G LG is not liable for any accidents or damage to property or
TV due to incorrect installation:
- Where a non-compliant VESA wall mount is used.
- Incorrect fastening of screws to surface which may cause
TV to fall and cause personal injury.
- Not following the recommended Installation method.
G
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
Model
19/22LU40**
19/22LU50**
26LU50**
19/22LG31**
26LG31**
32LF25**
37/42LF25**
32LG2***
37/42LG2***
32LG33**
37/42LG33**
19/22LH20**
26/32LH20**
37/42LH20**
19/22LD3**
26/32LD3**
32LH3***
37/42/47LH3***
32LH40**
37/42/47LH40**
32LH49**
37/42/47LH49**
32LH50**
37/42/47LH50**
55LH50**
32LH70**
37/42/47LH70**
42/47LH90**
32LF51**
42/47LF51**
50PS70**
60PS70**
50PS80**
60PS80**
42/50PQ35**
42PQ65**
50PS65**
VESA Standard
(A * B)
Screw Quantity
4
100 * 100 M4
4
100 * 100 M4
4
200 * 100 M4
4
100 * 100 M4
4
200 * 100 M4
4
200 * 100 M4
4
200 * 200 M6
4
200 * 100 M4
4
200 * 200 M6
4
200 * 100 M4
4
200 * 200 M6
4
100 * 100 M4
4
200 * 100 M4
4
200 * 200 M6
4
100 * 100 M4
4
200 * 100 M4
4
200 * 100 M4
4
200 * 200 M6
4
200 * 100 M4
4
200 * 200 M6
4
200 * 100 M4
4
200 * 200 M6
4
200 * 100 M4
4
200 * 200 M6
4
400 * 400 M6
4
200 * 100 M4
4
200 * 200 M6
4
200 * 200 M6
4
200 * 100 M4
4
200 * 200 M6
4
400 * 400 M6
4
600 * 400 M8
4
400 * 400 M6
4
600 * 400 M8
4
400 * 400 M6
4
400 * 400 M6
4
400 * 400 M6
PREPARATION
Ensure that you connect the earth wire to prevent
possible electric shock. If grounding methods are not
possible, have a qualified electrician install a separate
circuit breaker.
Do not try to earth the TV by connecting it to telephone wires, lightening rods or gas pipes.
35
PREPARATION
■
To prevent damage do not connect to the mains outlet until all connections are made between the devices.
ANTENNA CONNECTION
■
■
For optimum picture quality, adjust antenna direction.
An antenna cable and converter are not supplied.
PREPARATION
Wall
Antenna
Socket
Outdoor
Antenna
(VHF, UHF)
Multi-family Dwellings/Apartments
(Connect to wall antenna socket)
RF Coaxial Wire (75 Ω)
Single-family Dwellings /Houses
(Connect to wall jack for outdoor antenna)
UHF
Antenna
Signal
Amplifier
VHF
■
■
In poor signal areas, to achieve better picture quality it may be necessary to install a signal amplifier to the
antenna as shown above.
If signal needs to be split for two TVs, use an antenna signal splitter for connection.
Use of ferrite core (This feature is not available for all models)
Ferrite core can be used to reduce the electromagnetic
wave when connecting the power cord.
The closer the location of the ferrite core to the power
plug, the better it is.
Install the power plug closely.
36
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
To avoid damaging any equipment, never plug in any power cord until you have finished connecting all equipment.
This section on EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP mainly uses diagrams for the 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80** models.
■
■
Image shown may differ from your TV.
■
HD RECEIVER SETUP
■
This TV can receive Digital RF/Cable signals without an external digital set-top box. However, if you do receive
Digital signals from a digital set-top box or other digital external device, refer to the diagram as shown below.
Connecting with a Component cable
Connect the video outputs (Y, PB, PR) of the digital set
top box to the C O M P O N E N T I N V I D E O jacks on the
TV.
2
Connect the audio output of the digital set-top box to
the C O M P O N E N T I N A U D I O jacks on the TV.
3
Turn on the digital set-top box.
(Refer to the owner’s manual for the digital set-top box.)
4
Select C o m p o n e n t input source using the I N P U T
button on the remote control.
1
2
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
1
G HDMI
Audio Supported format : Dolby Digital, PCM
DTS Audio format is not supported.
Signal
Component
480i/576i
O
X
480p/576p
O
O
720p/1080i
O
O
1080p
HDMI
O
O
(50 Hz / 60 Hz only)
(24 Hz / 30 Hz / 50 Hz / 60 Hz)
37
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
Connecting a set-top box with an HDMI cable
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
1
Connect the digital set-top box to H D M I / D V I I N 1, H D M I I N
2 (Except for 19/22LH20**, 19/22LD3**, 19/22LG31**),,
H D M I I N 3 (Except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22LU50**,
19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 19/22/26/32LD3**,
32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**,
26LG31**) or H D M I I N 4 (Only 32/37/42/47LH49**,
32/37/42/47/55LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70**,
42/47LH90**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**) jack on the TV.
2
Turn on the digital set-top box.
(Refer to the owner’s manual for the digital set-top box.)
3
Select H D M I 1, H D M I 2(Except for 19/22LH20**,
19/22LD3**, 19/22LG31**), H D M I 3 (Except for
19/22LU40**, 19/22LU50**,
19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 19/22/26/32LD3**,
32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**,
26LG31**) or H D M I 4(Only 32/37/42/47LH49**,
32/37/42/47/55LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70**,
42/47LH90**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**) input
source using the I N P U T button on the remote control.
1
! NOTE
G Check
that your HDMI cable is version 1.3 or higher.
If the HDMI cables don’t support HDMI version 1.3, flickering or no screen display can result. Please use the latest
cables that support at least HDMI version 1.3.
Connecting with an HDMI to DVI cable
1
Connect the digital set-top box to H D M I / D V I I N 1
jack on the TV.
2
Connect the audio output of the digital set-top box to
the A U D I O I N ( R G B / D V I ) jack on the TV.
3
Turn on the digital set-top box. (Refer to the owner’s
manual for the digital set-top box.)
4
38
Select H D M I 1 input source using the I N P U T button
on the remote control.
1
2
DVD SETUP
Connecting with a Component cable
1
Connect the video outputs (Y, PB, PR) of the DVD to the
C O M P O N E N T I N V I D E O jacks on the TV.
1
Connect the audio outputs of the DVD to the
C O M P O N E N T I N A U D I O jacks on the TV.
3
Turn on the DVD player, insert a DVD.
2
4
Select C o m p o n e n t input source using the I N P U T
button on the remote control.
5
Refer to the DVD player's manual for operating instructions.
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
2
Component Input ports
To achieve better picture quality, connect a DVD player to the component input ports as shown below.
Component ports on the TV
Video output ports
on DVD player
Y
PB
PR
Y
PB
PR
Y
B-Y
R-Y
Y
Cb
Cr
Y
Pb
Pr
39
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
Connecting with a Euro Scart cable
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
1
Connect the Euro scart socket of the DVD to the A V 1
Euro scart socket on the TV.
2
Turn on the DVD player, insert a DVD.
3
Select A V 1 input source using the I N P U T button on
the remote control.
If connected to A V 2 Euro scart socket, select A V 2
input source.
4
1
Refer to the DVD player's manual for operating
instructions.
Scart
Video
O
AV1
AV2
O
Audio
O
O
RGB
O
X
(R) AUDIO (L)
AUDIO/
VIDEO
Output
Input
Video, Audio
Analogue only
Analogue, DTV, AV1/2/3 output is available.
AV2
Output Type
Current
input mode
Digital TV
AV1
(TV Out)
X
O
O
Analogue TV, AV1/3
O
O
O
Component/RGB
O
X
HDMI
(The input mode is converted to
DTV.)
X
X
AV2
O
O
AV2
(Monitor Out)
(When DTV scheduled recording is in
progress using recording equipment.)
G
TV Out : Outputs analogue
TV signals.
Monitor Out: Outputs
the current screen image.
O
! NOTE
G
Any Euro scart cable used must be signal shielded.
Connecting with a S-Video cable
(Only 32/37/42/47LH70**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**, 42/50PQ35**, 42PQ65**, 50PS65**)
1
Connect the S-VIDEO output of the DVD to the S V I D E O input on the TV.
2
Connect the audio outputs of the DVD to the A U D I O
input jacks on the TV.
3
Turn on the DVD player, insert a DVD.
4
Select A V 3 input source using the I N P U T button on
the remote control.
5
Refer to the DVD player's manual for operating instructions.
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
R
OUTPUT
SWITCH
1
40
L
ANT IN
ANT OUT
2
Connecting the HDMI cable
Connect the HDMI output of the DVD to the H D M I / D V I I N
1 , H D M I I N 2(Except for 19/22LH20**, 19/22LD3**,
19/22LG31**),, H D M I I N 3 (Except for 19/22LU40**,
19/22LU50**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**,
19/22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***,
32/37/42LG33**, 26LG31**) or H D M I I N 4 (Only
32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47/55LH50**,
32/37/42/47LH70**, 42/47LH90**, 50/60PS70**,
50/60PS80**) jack on the TV.
2
Select H D M I 1, H D M I 2(Except for 19/22LH20**,
19/22LD3**, 19/22LG31**), H D M I 3(Except for
19/22LU40**, 19/22LU50**,
19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 19/22/26/32LD3**,
32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**,
26LG31**) or H D M I 4(Only 32/37/42/47LH49**,
32/37/42/47/55LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70**,
42/47LH90**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**) input source
using the I N P U T button on the remote control.
3
Refer to the DVD player's manual for operating instructions.
1
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
1
! NOTE
G The
TV can receive video and audio signals simultaneously
when using an HDMI cable.
G If the DVD does not support Auto HDMI, you must set the
output resolution appropriately.
G Check that your HDMI cable is version 1.3 or higher.
If the HDMI cables don’t support HDMI version 1.3, flickering or no screen display can result. Please use the latest
cables that support at least HDMI version 1.3.
41
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
VCR SETUP
■
To avoid picture noise (interference), allow adequate distance between the VCR and TV.
Connecting with a RF Cable
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
ANT OUT
S-VIDEO
ANT IN
OUTPUT
SWITCH
VIDEO
L
R
1
2
Wall Jack
Antenna
42
1
Connect the A N T O U T socket of the VCR to the A N T E N N A I N socket on the TV.
2
Connect the antenna cable to the A N T I N socket of the VCR.
3
Press the P L A Y button on the VCR and match the appropriate channel between the TV and VCR for
viewing.
Connecting with a Euro Scart cable
Connect the Euro scart socket of the VCR to the A V 1
Euro scart socket on the TV.
2
Insert a video tape into the VCR and press PLAY on
the VCR. (Refer to the VCR owner’s manual.)
3
Select A V 1 input source using the I N P U T button on
the remote control.
1
If connected to A V 2 Euro scart socket, select A V 2
input source.
4
Output
Input
Scart
Video
O
AV1
AV2
O
Audio
O
O
RGB
O
X
Video, Audio
Analogue only
(R) AUDIO (L)
AUDIO/
VIDEO
Analogue, DTV, AV1/2/3 output is available.
AV2
Output Type
Current
input mode
Digital TV
AV1
(TV Out)
X
O
O
Analogue TV, AV1/3
O
O
O
Component/RGB
O
X
HDMI
(The input mode is converted to
DTV.)
X
X
AV2
O
O
AV2
(Monitor Out)
(When DTV scheduled recording is in
progress using recording equipment.)
G
TV Out : Outputs analogue
TV signals.
Monitor Out: Outputs
the current screen image.
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
1
O
! NOTE
Any Euro Scart cable used must be signal shielded.
G
Connecting with a RCA cable
(Except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22LU50**, 19/22LH20**, 19/22LD3**, 19/22LG31**, 32/37/42LF25**)
1
V I D E O jacks between TV and
Connect the A U D I O/V
VCR. Match the jack colours (Video = yellow, Audio Left
= white, and Audio Right = red)
1
2
Insert a video tape into the VCR and press PLAY on
the VCR. (Refer to the VCR owner’s manual.)
3
Select A V 3 input source using the I N P U T button on
the remote control.
! NOTE
G
If you have a mono VCR, connect the audio cable from the
VCR to the A U D I O L / M O N O jack of the TV.
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
OUTPUT
SWITCH
L
R
ANT IN
ANT OUT
43
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
Connecting with a S-Video cable
(Only 32/37/42/47LH70**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**, 42/50PQ35**, 42PQ65**, 50PS65**)
S-VIDEO
Connect the S-VIDEO output of the VCR to the S V I D E O input on the TV set. The picture quality is
improved; compared to normal composite (RCA cable)
input.
1
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
2
Connect the audio outputs of the VCR to the A U D I O
input jacks on the TV.
3
Insert a video tape into the VCR and press PLAY on the
VCR. (Refer to the VCR owner’s manual.)
4
Select A V 3 input source with using the I N P U T button on
the remote control.
VIDEO
L
R
OUTPUT
SWITCH
1
ANT IN
ANT OUT
2
! NOTE
G
If both S-VIDEO and VIDEO sockets have been connected to
the S-VHS VCR simultaneously, only the S-VIDEO can be
received.
INSERTION OF CI MODULE
- To view the encrypted (pay) services in digital TV
mode.
- This feature is not available in all countries.
1
Insert the CI Module to P C M C I A (Personal Computer
Memory Card International Association) C A R D S L O T
of TV as shown.
For further information, see p.77.
! NOTE
G Check
if the CI module is inserted into the PCMCIA card slot in
the right direction. If the module is not inserted properly, this
can cause damage to the TV and the PCMCIA card slot.
44
1
Check this point as shown
and insert the CI Module.
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT SETUP
Sending the TV’s audio signal to external audio equipment via the Digital Audio Output (Optical) port.
If you want to enjoy digital broadcasting through 5.1-channel speakers, connect the OPTICAL DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT terminal on the back of TV to a Home Theater (or amp).
Connect one end of an optical cable to the TV Digital
Audio (Optical) Output port.
2
Connect the other end of the optical cable to the digital audio (Optical) input on the audio equipment.
3
Set the “TV Speaker option - Off ” in the AUDIO
menu.(Gp .132). Refer to the external audio equipment
instruction manual for operation.
1
2
CAUTION
G Do
not look into the optical output port. Looking at the
laser beam may damage your vision.
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
1
HEADPHONE SETUP
(Except for 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**, 42/50PQ35**, 42PQ65**, 50PS65**)
You can listen the sound through the headphone.
1
Plug the headphone into the headphone socket.
2
+ or
To adjust the headphone volume, press the
- button. If you press the MUTE button, the sound
from the headphone is switched off.
! NOTE
G
G
G
A U D I O menu items are disabled when connecting a headphone.
When changing A V M O D E with a headphone connected, the change is applied to video but not to audio.
Optical Digital Audio Out is not available when connecting a headphone.
45
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
OTHER A/V SOURCE SETUP
(Except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22LU50**, 19/22LH20**, 19/22LD3**, 19/22LG31**,
32/37/42LF25**)
Camcorder
Video Game Set
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
46
VIDEO
L
R
1
1
V I D E O jacks between TV and external equipment. Match the jack colours.
Connect the A U D I O/V
(Video = yellow, Audio Left = white, and Audio Right = red)
2
Select A V 3 input source with using the I N P U T button on the remote control.
3
Operate the corresponding external equipment.
Refer to external equipment operating guide.
USB SETUP
(Except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***,
32/37/42LG33**, 19/22/26LG31**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 19/22/26/32LD3**,
32/37/42/47LH3***, 32/42/47LF51**)
1
Connect the USB device to the U S B I N jack on the TV.
2
After connecting the U S B I N jack, you use the U S B function. (G p .96)
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
1
47
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
PC SETUP
This TV provides Plug and Play capability, meaning that the PC adjusts automatically to the TV's settings.
Connecting with a D-sub 15 pin cable
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
1
Connect the RGB output of the PC to the R G B I N
( P C ) jack on the TV.
2
Connect the PC audio output to the A U D I O I N
( R G B / D V I ) jack on the TV.
3
Turn on the PC and the TV
2
4
1
Select R G B input source using the INPUT button on
the remote control.
AUDIO
48
RGB OUTPUT
Connecting with an HDMI to DVI cable
Connect the DVI output of the PC to the H D M I / D V I
I N 1 jack on the TV.
2
Connect the PC audio output to the A U D I O I N
( R G B / D V I ) jack on the TV.
3
Turn on the PC and the TV.
4
Select H D M I 1 input source using the INPUT button
on the remote control.
1
DVI-PC OUTPUT
2
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
1
AUDIO
49
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
Supported Display Resolution
Plasma TV Models
HDMI/DVI-DTV mode
RGB-PC, HDMI/DVI-PC mode
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
Resolution
Horizontal
Frequency(kHz)
Vertical
Frequency(Hz)
Resolution
Horizontal
Frequency(kHz)
Vertical
Frequency(Hz)
720x400
31.468
70.08
640x480
31.649
59.94
640x480
31.469
59.94
31.469
60
800x600
37.879
60.31
31.47
59.94
720x480
1024x768
48.363
60.00
31.50
60
1280x768
47.78
59.87
720x576
31.25
50.00
1360x768
47.72
59.80
1280x720
37.50
50.00
1920x1080
66.587
59.934
44.96
59.94
1280x1024
63.98
60.02
45.00
60
1400x1050
65.317
59.979
28.125
50.00
33.72
59.94
33.75
60
1920x1080
(Except for 42/50PQ35**, 42PQ65**)
27.00
24.00
33.750
30
56.25
50.00
67.433
59.94
67.50
60
LCD TV Models / LED LCD TV Models
HDMI/DVI-DTV mode
RGB-PC, HDMI/DVI-PC mode
Vertical
Frequency(Hz)
Resolution
Horizontal
Frequency(kHz)
Vertical
Frequency(Hz)
31.468
70.08
720x480
31.469/31.5
59.94/60
31.469
59.94
720x576
31.25
50
800x600
37.879
60.31
1280x720
37.5
50
1024x768
48.363
60.00
44.96/45
59.94/60
33.72/33.75
59.94/60
28.125
50
26.97/27
23.97/24
33.716/33.75
29.976/30.00
Resolution
Horizontal
Frequency(kHz)
720x400
640x480
1280x768
47.78
59.87
1360x768
47.72
59.80
1280x1024
63.595
60.00
1920x1080
66.587
59.93
67.5
60.00
1440x900
55.5
59.90
1400x1050
64.744
59.948
1680x1050
65.16
59.94
(RGB-PC)
1920x1080
(HDMI-PC)
50
(Except for 19/22LU40**,
19LU50**,
19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**
, 19/22/26/32LD3**,
32/37/42LG2***,
32/37/42LG33**,26LG31**)
(Except for 19/22LU40**,
19LU50**,
19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**,
19/22/26/32LD3**,
32/37/42LG2***,
32/37/42LG33**,19/22/26LG
31**)
(Only 19LG31**)
(Only 22LG31**)
1920x1080
56.25
50
67.43/67.5
59.94/60
! NOTE
G
G
G
G
We recommend using 1920x1080, 60 Hz (Except
for 19/22LU40**, 19LU50**,
19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**,
19/22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42LG2***,
32/37/42LG33**, 19/22/26LG31**,
42/50PQ35**, 42PQ65**), 1360x768, 60 Hz
(Only 19/22LU40**, 19LU50**,
19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**,
19/22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42LG2***,
32/37/42LG33**, 26LG31**, 50PQ35**),
1024x768, 60 Hz (Only 42PQ35**, 42PQ65**) ,
1440x900, 60 Hz (Only 19LG31**) , 1680x1050,
60 Hz (Only 22LG31**)for the PC mode, this
should provide the best picture quality.
G
G
G
G
G
G
Connect the signal cable from the monitor output port of the PC to the RGB (PC) port of the
TV or the signal cable from the HDMI output
port of the PC to the HDMI IN (or HDMI/DVI
IN) port on the TV.
Connect the audio cable from the PC to the
Audio input on the TV. (Audio cables are not
included with the TV).
If using a sound card, adjust PC sound as
required.
If the graphic card on the PC does not output
analogue and digital RGB simultaneously, connect
only one of either RGB or HDMI IN (or
HDMI/DVI IN) to display the PC output on the
TV.
If the graphic card on the PC does output analogue
and digital RGB simultaneously, set the TV to either
RGB or HDMI; (the other mode is set to Plug and
Play automatically by the TV.)
DOS mode may not work depending on the video
card if you use an HDMI to DVI cable.
If you use too long an RGB-PC cable that is too
long, there may be interference on the screen.
We recommend using under 5m of cable. This
provides the best picture quality.
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
G
Avoid keeping a fixed image on the set’s screen
for prolonged periods of time. The fixed image
may become permanently imprinted on the
screen; use a screen saver when possible.
There may be interference relating to resolution,
vertical pattern, contrast or brightness in PC
mode. Change the PC mode to another resolution or change the refresh rate to another rate or
adjust the brightness and contrast on the menu
until the picture is clear. If the refresh rate of the
PC graphic card can not be changed, change the
PC graphic card or consult the manufacturer of
the PC graphic card.
The synchronization input waveform for
Horizontal and Vertical frequencies are separate.
51
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
Screen Setup for PC mode
Screen Reset
Returns Position, Size and Phase to the factory default settings.
This function works in the following mode : RGB[PC].
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
PICTURE
Move
SCREEN
OK
E
• Contrast
50
• Sharpness
70
• Colour
60
• Tint
0
Auto Config.
Position
R
G
Size
• Advanced Control
• Picture Reset
Prev.
Resolution
90
• Brightness
Move
To Set
Yes
No
Phase
Screen
Screen
Reset
1 MENU
2
Select P I C T U R E.
OK
Select S c r e e n.
OK
Select R e s e t.
OK
Select Y e s.
3
4
5
OK
Run R e s e t.
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
52
Adjustment for screen Position, Size, Phase
If the picture is not clear after auto adjustment and especially if characters are still trembling, adjust the picture phase manually.
This function works in the following mode : RGB[PC].
Move
SCREEN
OK
Move
Prev.
E
• Contrast
90
• Brightness
50
• Sharpness
70
• Colour
60
• Tint
0
Resolution
Auto Config.
Position
R
G
Size
• Advanced Control
• Picture Reset
Phase
Screen
Screen
Reset
1 MENU
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
PICTURE
Select P I C T U R E.
2
OK
3
OK
4
OK
5
OK
Select S c r e e n.
Select P o s i t i o n, S i z e or P h a s e.
Make appropriate adjustments.
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
53
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
Selecting Resolution
To view a normal picture, match the resolution of RGB mode and selection of PC mode.
This function works in the following mode: RGB[PC]
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
SCREEN
PICTURE
Move
Resolution
E
• Contrast
90
• Brightness
50
• Sharpness
70
• Colour
60
• Tint
0
Move
Prev.
OK
Auto Config.
1024 x 768
1280 x 768
1360 x 768
Position
R
G
Size
• Advanced Control
• Picture Reset
Screen
Screen
1 MENU
2
Phase
Reset
Select P I C T U R E.
OK
Select S c r e e n.
OK
Select R e s o l u t i o n.
3
4
OK
5
Select the desired resolution.
OK
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
54
Auto Configure (RGB [PC] mode only)
Automatically adjusts the picture position and minimizes image instability. After adjustment, if the image is
still not correct, your TV is functioning properly but needs further adjustment.
PICTURE
Move
SCREEN
OK
E
• Contrast
50
• Sharpness
70
• Colour
60
• Tint
0
Prev.
Resolution
90
• Brightness
Move
Auto Config.
Position
R
G
Size
To Set
Yes
No
• Advanced Control
• Picture Reset
Phase
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP
Auto configure
This function is for automatic adjustment of the screen position, size, and phase The displayed image will be
unstable for a few seconds while the auto configuration is in progress.
Screen
Screen
Reset
1 MENU
Select P I C T U R E.
• If the position of the image is still not correct,
try Auto adjustment again.
2
• If picture needs to be adjusted again after Auto
OK
Select S c r e e n.
OK
Select A u t o C o n f i g ..
OK
Select Y e s.
adjustment in RGB (PC), you can adjust the
P o s i t i o n, S i z e or P h a s e.
3
4
5
OK
Run A u t o C o n f i g ..
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
55
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
REMOTE CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS
(Only 32/37/42/47LH40**, 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47/55LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70**,
32/42/47LF51**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**, 42PQ65**, 50PS65**)
When using the remote control, aim it at the remote control sensor on the TV.
ENERGY SAVING Adjust the Energy Saving mode of the TV. (G p . 1 1 6)
RATIO Selects your desired Aspect Ratio of picture. (G p . 1 1 3)
POWER Switches the TV on from standby or off to standby.
INPUT External input mode rotate in regular sequence. (G p . 8 0)
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
TV/RAD Selects Radio, TV and DTV channel.
Q. MENU Select the desired quick menu source. (Aspect Ratio,
Clear Voice II , Picture Mode, Sound Mode, Audio, Sleep
Timer, Favourite, USB Device).(G p . 6 3)
MENU Selects a menu.
Clears all on-screen displays and returns to TV viewing
from any menu.(G p . 6 4)
GUIDE Shows programme schedule.(G p . 1 1 0)
THUMBSTICK Allows you to navigate the on-screen menus and adjust
(Up/Down/Left/ the system settings to your preference.
Right)
OK Accepts your selection or displays the current mode.
RETURN(EXIT) Allows the user to move return one step in an interactive application, EPG or other user interaction function.
INFO i Shows the present screen information.
AV MODE It helps you select and set images and sounds when
connecting AV devices.(G p . 8 6)
Coloured These buttons are used for teletext (on T E L E T E X T
buttons models only) , P r o g r a m m e e d i t.
1
1
1
TELETEXT These buttons are used for teletext.
BUTTONS For further details, see the ‘Teletext’ section.(G p . 1 4 9)
SUBTITLE Recalls your preferred subtitle in digital mode.
See a list of AV devices connected to TV.
When you toggle this button, the Simplink menu appears
at the screen.(G p . 8 3)
56
VOLUME UP Adjusts the volume.
/DOWN
MARK Check and un-check programmes in the USB menu.
FAV Displays the selected favourite programme.
MUTE Switches the sound on or off.
PAGE Move from one full set of screen information to the next
UP/DOWN one.
0~9 number Selects a programme.
button Selects numbered items in a menu.
LIST Displays the programme table.(G p . 7 8)
Q.VIEW Returns to the previously viewed programme.
SIMPLINK /
USB Menu
control buttons
Controls SIMPLINK or USB menu(Photo List and Music
List or Movie List (Only 32/37/42/47LH49**,
32/37/42/47/55LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70**,
50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**, 42PQ65**, 50PS65**)).
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
Programme Selects a programme.
UP/DOWN
FREEZE Pause the present picture at the screen.(Plasma TV only)
Installing Batteries
■
Open the battery compartment cover on the back and install the
batteries matching correct polarity (+ with +,- with -).
■
Install two 1.5 V AAA batteries. Do not mix old or used batteries
with new ones.
■
Close cover.
■
To remove the batteries, perform the installation actions in reverse.
57
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
REMOTE CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS
(Only 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, 19/22/26LG31**,
19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 19/22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42/47LH3***, 42/50PQ35**)
When using the remote control, aim it at the remote control sensor on the TV.
TV/RAD Selects Radio, TV and DTV channel.
AV MODE It helps you select and set images and sounds when connecting AV devices.(G p . 8 6)
POWER Switches the TV on from standby or off to standby.
POWER
AV MODE
INPUT External input mode rotate in regular sequence. (G p . 8 0)
ENERGY SAVING
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
ENERGY SAVING Adjust the Energy Saving mode of the TV. (G p . 1 1 6)
0~9 number Selects a programme.
button Selects numbered items in a menu.
Q.VIEW Returns to the previously viewed programme.
LIST
Q.VIEW
LIST Displays the programme table.(G p . 7 8)
MUTE
THUMBSTICK Allows you to navigate the on-screen menus and adjust
(Up/Down/Left/Right) the system settings to your preference.
OK Accepts your selection or displays the current mode.
MENU Selects a menu.
Clears all on-screen displays and returns to TV viewing
from any menu.(G p . 6 4)
RETURN(EXIT) Allows the user to move return one step in an interactive
application, EPG or other user interaction function.
RETURN / EXIT
MENU
Coloured These buttons are used for teletext (on T E L E T E X T
buttons models only) , P r o g r a m m e e d i t.
1
Q.MENU INFO
i
GUIDE MARK
FAV
1
TELETEXT These buttons are used for teletext.
BUTTONS For further details, see the ‘Teletext’ section.(G p . 1 4 9)
SUBTITLE Recalls your preferred subtitle in digital mode.
See a list of AV devices connected to TV.
When you toggle this button, the Simplink menu appears
at the screen.(G p . 8 3)
58
VOLUME UP Adjusts the volume.
/DOWN
MUTE Switches the sound on or off.
POWER
AV MODE
ENERGY SAVING
Programme Selects a programme.
UP/DOWN
SIMPLINK Controls SIMPLINK.
control buttons
LIST
Q.VIEW
MUTE
Q. MENU Select the desired quick menu source. (Aspect Ratio,
Clear Voice II , Picture Mode, Sound Mode, Audio, Sleep
Timer, Favourite, Energy Saving.)(G p . 6 3)
INFO i Shows the present screen information.
GUIDE Shows programme schedule.(G p . 1 1 0)
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
PAGE Move from one full set of screen information to the next
UP/DOWN one.
FAV Displays the selected favourite programme.
MARK Select the input to apply the Picture Wizard settings.
RETURN / EXIT
MENU
Q.MENU INFO
i
Installing Batteries
GUIDE MARK
FAV
■
Open the battery compartment cover on the back and install the
batteries matching correct polarity (+with +,-with -).
■
Install two 1.5 V AAA batteries. Do not mix old or used batteries
with new ones.
■
Close cover.
■
To remove the batteries, perform the installation actions in reverse.
59
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
REMOTE CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS
(Only 42/47LH90**)
When using the remote control, aim it at the remote control sensor on the TV.
POWER Switches the TV on from standby or off to standby.
POWER
ON/OFF
ON/OFF Key lighting on or off.
TV/RAD
TV/RAD Selects Radio, TV and DTV channel.
ENERGY SAVING Adjust the Energy Saving mode of the TV.(G p . 1 1 6)
INFO i Shows the present screen information.
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
INPUT External input mode rotate in regular sequence.(G p . 8 0)
0~9 number Selects a programme.
button Selects numbered items in a menu.
LIST Displays the programme table. (G p . 7 8)
Q.VIEW Returns to the previously viewed programme.
MARK
MENU Selects a menu.
Clears all on-screen displays and returns to TV viewing
from any menu.(G p . 6 4)
FAV
Q. MENU Select the desired quick menu source. (Aspect Ratio,
Clear Voice II , Picture Mode, Sound Mode, Audio, Sleep
Timer, Favourite, USB Device).(G p . 6 3)
THUMBSTICK Allows you to navigate the on-screen menus and adjust
(Up/Down/Left/Right) the system settings to your preference.
OK Accepts your selection or displays the current mode.
GUIDE Shows programme schedule.(G p . 1 1 0)
RETURN(EXIT) Allows the user to move return one step in an interactive
application, EPG or other user interaction function.
Coloured These buttons are used for teletext (on T E L E T E X T
buttons models only) , P r o g r a m m e e d i t.
1
1
AV MODE
TELETEXT These buttons are used for teletext.
BUTTONS For further details, see the ‘Teletext’ section.(G p . 1 4 9)
RATIO
SUBTITLE Recalls your preferred subtitle in digital mode.
60
POWER
VOLUME UP Adjusts the volume.
/DOWN
ON/OFF
TV/RAD
FAV Displays the selected favourite programme.
MARK Check and un-check programmes in the USB menu.
MUTE Switches the sound on or off.
PAGE Move from one full set of screen information to the next
UP/DOWN one.
SIMPLINK / Controls SIMPLINK or USB menu(Photo List and Music
USB Menu List or Movie List ).
control buttons
MARK
FAV
See a list of AV devices connected to TV.
When you toggle this button, the Simplink menu
appears at the screen.(G p . 8 3)
RATIO Selects your desired Aspect Ratio of picture.(G p . 1 1 3)
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
Programme Selects a programme.
UP/DOWN
AV MODE It helps you select and set images and sounds when
connecting AV devices.(G p . 8 6)
Installing Batteries
AV MODE
RATIO
■
Open the battery compartment cover on the back and install the
batteries matching correct polarity (+with +,-with -).
■
Install two 1.5 V AAA batteries. Do not mix old or used batteries
with new ones.
■
Close cover.
■
To remove the batteries, perform the installation actions in reverse.
61
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
TURNING ON THE TV
- When your TV is turned on, you will be able to use its features.
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
1
Firstly, connect the power cord correctly.
And switch the M a i n P o w e r S w i t c h on TV. (Only 42/47LH90**, 32/37/42/47LH70**,
19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 19/22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42/47LH3***, 32/37/42/47LH40**,
32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47/55LH50**, 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**)
At this stage, the TV switches to standby mode.
2
In standby mode to turn TV on, press the r / I(LCD TV/LED LCD TV only), INPUT or P D E (or P
) button on
the TV or press the POWER, INPUT, P
or NUMBER button on the remote control and the TV will switch on.
Initializing setup
If the OSD (On Screen Display) is displayed on the screen after turning on the TV, you can adjust the
L a n g u a g e, M o d e S e t t i n g, C o u n t r y, A u t o T u n i n g.
Note:
a. If you close without completing the initial setting, the Initial Setting menu can be displayed again.
b. Press the RETURN button to change the current OSD to the previous OSD.
c. For those countries without confirmed DTV broadcasting standards, some DTV features might not
work, depending on the DTV broadcasting environment.
d. "Home Use” mode is the optimal setting for home environments, and is the TV's default mode.
e. "Store Demo" mode is the optimal setting for store environments. If a user modifies image quality data,
“Store Demo” mode initializes the product to the image quality set by us after a certain period of time.
f. The mode (Home Use, Store Demo) can be changed by executing Mode Setting in the OPTION menu.
PROGRAMME SELECTION
1
Press the P
number.
or NUMBER buttons to select a programme
VOLUME ADJUSTMENT
1
Press the
+ or - button to adjust the volume.
If you wish to switch the sound off, press the MUTE button.
You can cancel this function by pressing the MUTE,
+ , - or AV Mode button.
62
QUICK MENU
Your TV's OSD (On Screen Display) may differ slightly from that shown in this manual.
Q.Menu (Quick Menu) is a menu of features which users might use frequently.
F
Aspect Ratio
G
16:9
(Except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**,
32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, 19/22/26LG31**,
19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 19/22/26/32LD3**,
32/37/42/47LH3***, 32/42/47LF51**)
1Q. MENU
2
A u d i o : Selects the sound output.
S l e e p T i m e r : Sets the sleep timer.
F a v o u r i t e : Selects the favourite programme.
USB Device : Selects “Eject” in order to eject USB device.(Except for
19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***,
32/37/42LG33**, 19/22/26LG31**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**,
19/22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42/47LH3***, 32/42/47LF51**)
E n e r g y S a v i n g : Selects your desired Energy Saving
mode. (Only 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**,
32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**,
19/22/26LG31**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**,
19/22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42/47LH3***,
32/42/47LF51**)
F
Aspect Ratio
G
16:9
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
A s p e c t R a t i o: Selects your desired picture format.
For Zoom Setting, select 14:9, Zoom and Cinema
Zoom in Ratio Menu. After completing Zoom
Setting, the display goes back to Q.Menu.
C l e a r V o i c e I I : By differentiating the human
sound range from others, it helps users listen to
human voices better.
P i c t u r e M o d e : Selects your desired Picture
Mode.
S o u n d M o d e : It is a feature to automatically set
the sound combination which it deems the best for
the images being watched. Selects your desired
Sound Mode.
(Only 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**,
32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, 19/22/26LG31**,
19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 19/22/26/32LD3**,
32/37/42/47LH3***, 32/42/47LF51**)
Display each menu.
Select your desired Source.
3
• Press the Q . M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
OK
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
63
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
ON SCREEN MENUS SELECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
Your TV's OSD (On Screen Display) may differ slightly from that shown in this manual.
SETUP
Move
PICTURE
OK
Move
Auto Tuning
Aspect Ratio
Manual Tuning
Picture Wizard
Programme Edit
: Off
Software Update
: On
Auto Volume
Clear Voice II
Energy Saving
Booster
AUDIO
OK
: 16:9
: Off
Picture Mode
Move
: Off
• Level
: Standard
• Backlight
Balance
70
Sound Mode
3
-
+
0
L
R
: Standard
Diagnostics
• Contrast
90
• SRS TruSurround XT : Off
CI Information
• Brightness
50
• Treble
50
• Sharpness
70
• Bass
50
E
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
OPTION
Move
Menu Language
: English
Audio Language
: English
Subtitle Language
: English
Hard of Hearing(
Country
OK
: Off
E
TIME
OK
Move
OK
Clock
SETUP
PICTURE
AUDIO
TIME
) : Off
Off Time
: Off
On Time
: Off
Sleep Timer
: Off
: UK
Input Label
SIMPLINK
: On
OPTION
: Off
Key Lock
LOCK
BLUETOOTH
E
USB
or
(Only 32/37/42/47LH49**,
32/37/42/47/55LH50**,
32/37/42/47LH70**,
42/47LH90**, 50/60PS70**,
50/60PS80**, 42/50PQ35**,
42PQ65**, 50PS65**)
INPUT
LOCK
Move
Lock System
OK
: Off
BLUETOOTH
Move
INPUT
OK
Move
OK
USB
Bluetooth
: Off
Antenna
Photo List
Set Password
TV PIN
: 0000
AV1
Music List
Block Programme
Bluetooth Headset : Disconnected
AV2
Movie List
AV3
DivX Reg. Code
Component
Deactivation
Parental Guidance
: Blocking Off
Input Block
Registered Bluetooth Device
My Bluetooth Info.
or
Move
OK
RGB
HDMI1
HDMI2
E
(Only 32/37/42/47LH70**, 42/47LH90**,
50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**)
1 MENU
Select a menu item.
OK
OK
(Except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**,
32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, 19/22/26LG31**,
19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 19/22/26/32LD3**,
32/37/42/47LH3***, 32/42/47LF51**)
Display each menu.
2
3
(Only 32/37/42/47LH40**,
32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47/55LH50**,
42/50PQ35**, 42PQ65**, 50PS65**)
Move to the pop up menu.
• Press the I N F O button, you can check the S i m p l e M a n u a l Menu.
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
! NOTE
G
G
64
G
G
It is possible to use I S M M e t h o d in P l a s m a T V models only.
It is possible to use B a c k l i g h t, P o w e r I n d i c a t o r in L C D T V / L E D L C D T V models only.
It is not possible to use C I I n f o r m a t i o n in Analogue mode.
It is not possible to use B o o s t e r in Analogue mode.(Except for 32/37/42/47LH70**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**,
42/50PQ35**, 42PQ65**, 50PS65**)
AUTO PROGRAMME TUNING
(For countries other than Finland and Sweden)
Use this to automatically find and store all available programmes.
When you start auto programming, all previously stored service information will be deleted.
The maximum number of programmes that can be stored is 500. But the number may differ slightly depending
on broadcasting signals.
SETUP
Move
OK
SETUP
Auto Tuning
Manual Tuning
Manual Tuning
Programme Edit
Software Update
Move
OK
Programme Edit
: On
Software Update
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
CI Information
CI Information
: On
Check your antenna connection.
The previous channel information
will be updated during Auto
Tuning.
SECAM L Search
Automatic Numbering
Start
Close
1 MENU
Select S E T U P.
• Use NUMBER buttons to input a 4-digit pass-
O n’.
word in L o c k S y s t e m ‘O
2
• If you wish to keep on auto tuning select S t a r t
OK
Select A u t o T u n i n g.
OK
Select S t a r t.
3
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
Auto Tuning
using the
button. Then, press the OK button. Otherwise select C l o s e.
• A u t o m a t i c N u m b e r i n g: Decide whether to
use the programme numbers as sent by broadcasting stations for tuning.
4
OK
Run A u t o t u n i n g.
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
65
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
AUTO PROGRAMME TUNING
(Only for Finland and Sweden)
DVB-C Auto Tuning is a menu for users in countries that support DVB cable.
Use this to automatically find and store all available programmes.
When you start auto programming, all previously stored service information will be deleted.
If you want to select the A n t e n n a,
SETUP
Move
OK
SETUP
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
Auto Tuning
Auto Tuning
Manual Tuning
Manual Tuning
Programme Edit
Software Update
Move
OK
Please select your TV Connection.
Check your antenna connection.
The previous channel information
will be updated during Auto
Tuning.
Programme Edit
: On
Software Update
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
CI Information
CI Information
: On
SECAM L Search
Automatic Numbering
Antenna
Cable
Close
1 MENU
Select S E T U P.
Start
Close
• Use NUMBER buttons to input a 4-digit pass-
O n’.
word in L o c k S y s t e m ‘O
• If you wish to keep on auto tuning select S t a r t
2
OK
Select A u t o T u n i n g.
OK
Select A n t e n n a.
OK
Select S t a r t.
3
4
using the
button. Then, press the OK
button. Otherwise select C l o s e.
• A u t o m a t i c N u m b e r i n g: Decide whether to
use the programme numbers as sent by broadcasting stations for tuning.
5
OK
Run A u t o t u n i n g.
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
66
If you want to select the C a b l e,
SETUP
Move
OK
SETUP
Move
OK
Please select your TV Connection.
Default
Auto Tuning
Manual Tuning
Manual Tuning
Frequency(kHz)
Programme Edit
Programme Edit
Symbol rate(kS/s)
Software Update
: On
Software Update
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
CI Information
CI Information
: On
Modulation
G
362000
6875
640AM
Network ID
Antenna
Cable
Close
1 MENU
F
Auto Tuning
0
OK
Close
• Use NUMBER buttons to input a 4-digit pass-
O n’.
word in L o c k S y s t e m ‘O
Select S E T U P.
• If you wish to keep on auto tuning, select O K
using the
button. Then, press the OK
button. Otherwise select C l o s e.
2
OK
Select A u t o T u n i n g.
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
OK
4
OK
Select C a b l e.
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
7
0
5
OK
Make appropriate adjustments.
Select S t a r t.
6
OK
Run A u t o t u n i n g.
The following values are needed in order to search all available programmes quickly and correctly.
The commonly used values are provided as "default".
However, for correct settings, please inquire of the cable service provider.
When running Auto Tuning in DVB cable mode, selecting Full will search through all frequencies between 110 MHz
and 862 MHz to find available channels.
In the case when the programme is not searched by selecting the Default, perform the searching by selecting the Full.
However, in the case when the programme is searched by selecting the Full, the Auto Tuning time can be taken too much.
• F r e q u e n c y : Enter a user-defined frequency range.
• S y m b o l r a t e : Enter a user-defined symbol rate (Symbol rate: Speed at which a device such as modem sends
symbols to a channel).
• M o d u l a t i o n : Enter a user-defined modulation. (Modulation: Loading of audio or video signals onto carrier).
• N e t w o r k I D(Sweden only) : Unique identifier allocated for each user.
Note
G If you select C a b l e after checking either Finland or Sweden, you can see C h a n n e l A u t o U p d a t e menu of
which the default value is O n.
G If you keep it O n, the channel information will be automatically updated whenever the network information changes.
G When C h a n n e l A u t o U p d a t e is O f f, the channel information will not be updated.
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
3
AUTO PROGRAMME TUNING
If you select the “ - - ” of Country Setting, (Except for Finland and Sweden)
To watch DVB-C in the countries excluding Finland and Sweden, select '-- -' as the C o u n t r y in O P T I O N.
You can select U s e r mode or F u l l mode in A u t o T u n i n g.
The corresponding home frequency information may need to be changed when tuning the U s e r mode, and
the corresponding information depends on the Cable Service Operator (SO) in service.
During F u l l mode tuning, some channel may be restricted for some Cable Service Operator (SO), and it may
take a long time for tuning.
Note
G Your cable provider may charge for their services, or require you to agree to its items and conditions of business.
G DVB-C Cable may not operate correctly with some cable providers.
G Compatibility with DVB-C digital cable broadcasts is not guaranteed.
67
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
MANUAL PROGRAMME TUNING (IN DIGITAL MODE)
Manual Tuning lets you manually add a programme to your programme list.
(For countries other than Finland and Sweden
& When selecting Antenna if Finland, Sweden or “--” country is chosen)
SETUP
Move
SETUP
OK
Move
F
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
Auto Tuning
Auto Tuning
Manual Tuning
Tuning
Manual
Manual Tuning
Programme Edit
Software Update
: On
OK
Programme Edit
UHF CH.
Software Update
: On
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
CI Information
CI Information
DTV
G
Your receiver will add this channel
to your channel list.
Bad
30
Normal
Good
Update
Close
1 MENU
Select S E T U P.
• Use NUMBER buttons to input a 4-digit pass-
O n’.
word in L o c k S y s t e m ‘O
2
OK
Select M a n u a l T u n i n g.
3
OK
Select D T V.
4
Select the desired channel number.
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
68
(When selecting Cable (DVB cable mode) if Finland, Sweden or “--” country is
chosen)
SETUP
Move
SETUP
OK
Move
F
OK
DTV
Auto Tuning
Frequency(kHz)
Manual Tuning
Tuning
Manual
Manual Tuning
Symbol rate(kS/s)
Programme Edit
Programme Edit
Software Update
: On
Software Update
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
CI Information
CI Information
Modulation
: On
Bad
G
362000
6875
640AM
Normal
Good
Add
Close
1 MENU
Select S E T U P.
2
• Use NUMBER buttons to input a 4-digit passOK
Select M a n u a l T u n i n g.
OK
Select D T V.
O n’.
word in L o c k S y s t e m ‘O
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
Auto Tuning
3
4
OK
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Make appropriate adjustments.
0
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
Frequency, Symbol rate, and Modulation mode are needed in order to add a programme correctly in DVB cable mode.
Please inquire of the cable service provider about the correct values.
69
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
MANUAL PROGRAMME TUNING (IN ANALOGUE MODE)
Manual Tuning lets you manually tune and arrange the stations in whatever order you desire.
SETUP
Move
OK
SETUP
Move
Auto Tuning
Auto Tuning
Manual Tuning
Manual Tuning
Programme Edit
Programme Edit
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
Software Update
: On
Diagnostics
TV
F
Storage
Software Update
G
3
: OnSystem
BG
Band
V/UHF
Diagnostics
CI Information
OK
CI Information
Channel
0
Fine
F G
Search
F G
Name
C 02
Store
Close
1 MENU
2
OK
Select S E T U P.
Select M a n u a l T u n i n g.
6
Select V / U H F or C a b l e.
7
or
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Select the desired
channel number.
0
8
3
OK
Select T V.
Commence searching.
9
4
or
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
7
Select the desired programme number on.
OK
Select S t o r e.
0
5
Select a TV system.
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
O n’.
• Use NUMBER buttons to input a 4-digit password in L o c k S y s t e m ‘O
• L : SECAM L/L’ (France)
B G : PAL B/G, SECAM B/G (Europe / East Europe / Asia / New Zealand / M.East / Africa / Australia)
I : PAL I/II (U.K. / Ireland / Hong Kong / South Africa)
D K : PAL D/K, SECAM D/K (East Europe / China / Africa / CIS)
• To store another channel, repeat steps 4 to 9.
70
SETUP
Move
SETUP
OK
Move
Auto Tuning
Auto Tuning
Manual Tuning
Manual Tuning
Programme Edit
Programme Edit
Software Update
: On
F
Software Update
Diagnostics
TV
G
Storage
: On
System
BG
Band
V/UHF
Diagnostics
CI Information
OK
CI Information
3
Channel
0
Fine
F G
Search
F G
Name
C 02
Store
A
Assigning a station name
You can assign a station name with five characters to each programme number.
1 MENU
5
Select S E T U P.
2
OK
Select M a n u a l T u n i n g.
OK
6
3
OK
7
A
Select C l o s e.
Select T V.
OK
4
Select the position and make
your choice of the second character, and so on.
You can use an the alphabet A
to Z , the number 0 to 9 , +/ -,
and blank.
OK
OK
Select S t o r e.
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
Close
Select N a m e.
Fine Tuning (Except for 32/37/42/47LH70**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**, 42/50PQ35**, 42PQ65**, 50PS65**)
Normally fine tuning is only necessary if reception is poor.
1 MENU
Select S E T U P.
4
OK
Select M a n u a l T u n i n g.
5
OK
Select T V.
6
2
3
Select F i n e.
Fine tune for the best picture and
sound.
OK
Select S t o r e.
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
71
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
PROGRAMME EDIT
When a programme number is skipped, it means that you will be unable to select it using P
viewing.
button during TV
If you wish to select the skipped programme, directly enter the programme number with the NUMBER buttons or
select it in the Programme edit menu.
This function enables you to skip the stored programmes.
You can change the programme number using “Move”function, if “Automatic Numbering” is unchecked when you
start Auto Tuning.
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
1
SETUP
Move
YLE TV1
OK
Auto Tuning
RADIO
2 YLE TV2
4 TV4 Stockholm
5 YLE FST
6 CNN
Manual Tuning
: On
Diagnostics
CI Information
TV
8 YLE24
9 YLE Teema
Programme Edit
Edit
Programme
Software Update
DTV
1 YLE TV1
14 TV4 Film
24 TV4 Fakta
50 TV400
24 TV4 Fakta
84 Kanal Lokal
24 TV4 Fakta
86 Info/3sat
87 Doku/Kika
88 TVE 1
E
Pr. Change
Navigation
P
Page Change
Previous
Skip
1 MENU
Select S E T U P.
• Use NUMBER buttons to input a 4-digit pass-
O n’.
word in L o c k S y s t e m ‘O
2
OK
Select P r o g r a m m e E d i t.
3
OK
4
Enter the P r o g r a m m e E d i t.
Select a programme to be
stored or skipped.
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
72
IN DTV/RADIO MODE
A
Skipping a programme number
1
• When programmes are to be skipped, the
skipped programme shows in blue and these
programmes will not be selected by the P
buttons during TV viewing.
Select a programme number to be skipped.
2
BLUE Turn the programme number to blue.
3
• If you wish to select a skipped programme, directly
enter the programme number with the NUMBER buttons or select it in the programme edit or EPG.
BLUE Release.
This function enables you to delete or skip the stored programmes.
You can also move some channels and use other programme numbers.
A
Deleting a programme
1
Select a programme number to be deleted.
2
RED Turn the programme number to red.
3
RED Delete. BLUE Release.
• The selected programme is deleted, all the fol-
lowing programmes are shifted up one
Moving a programme
A
3
1
Select a programme number to be moved.
2
Turn the programme number to green.
GREEN
A
GREEN Release.
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
IN TV MODE
Auto Sort
1
• After activating Auto Sort once, you can no longer
edit programmes.
YELLOW Start Auto Sort.
A
Skipping a programme number
1
Select a programme number to be skipped.
2
BLUE Turn the programme number to blue.
3
• When a programme number is skipped it means
that you will be unable to select it using the P
button during normal TV viewing.
• If you wish to select a skipped programme, directly
enter the programme number with the NUMBER buttons or select it in the programme edit or EPG.
BLUE Release.
73
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
BOOSTER (IN DIGITAL MODE)
(Except for 32/37/42/47LH70**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**, 42/50PQ35**,
42PQ65**, 50PS65**)
If reception is poor select Booster to On.
When the signal is strong, select "Off".
SETUP
Move
OK
SETUP
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
Auto Tuning
Auto Tuning
Manual Tuning
Manual Tuning
Programme Edit
Booster
Booster
: On
Booster
Booster
Software Update
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
CI Information
CI Information
1 MENU
OK
Programme Edit
: On
Software Update
Move
Off
: On
On
On
: On
Select S E T U P.
2
Select B o o s t e r.
OK
3
Select O n or O f f.
OK
4
OK
Save.
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
74
SOFTWARE UPDATE
Software Update means software can be downloaded through the digital terrestrial broadcasting system.
SETUP
Move
SETUP
OK
Auto Tuning
Manual Tuning
Manual Tuning
Software Update
On
:: On
Software Update
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
CI Information
CI Information
4
OK
Save.
* When setting “Software Update”
Software update is available.
Would you like to download now?
(approximately 30 Min ~ 2 hours)
Your TV software is updated when you turn off the TV
using the remote control or local key.
Do not unplug!
Yes
No
Simple Update :for current
update stream
A new software update is available at 00/00/0 00:00.
Do you want to update the software when available?
Yes
Select the Y e s using the
button and you will see the following picture.
After the Software Update is
complete, the System restarts.
Software downloading progress.
Ver. 03.02.00
Ver. 03.01.00
E
Occasionally, a transmission of
updated digital software information will result in the following
menu on the TV screen.
i
New Software is successfully installed.
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
OK
Select S o f t w a r e U p d a t e.
OK
Off
On
:: On
On
On
Select O n or O f f.
• If you select O n, a user confirm message box will be displayed to notify that new software is found.
3
Select S E T U P.
2
OK
Programme Edit
Programme Edit
1 MENU
Move
Auto Tuning
65%
Hide
Stop
When the power is turned off, downloading
starts.
When the power is turned on while updating, the progress status is displayed.
No
Schedule Update : for scheduled
update stream
When the Software Update
O f f", the message to
menu is "O
O n" appears.
change it to "O
- During Progress of a Software Update, please note the following:
• Power to the TV must not be interrupted.
• The TV must not be switched off.
• The antenna must not be disconnected.
• After Software Update, you can confirm the updated software version in Diagnostics menu.
• It may take hours to download the software, so make sure that the power stays on during the download.
75
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
DIAGNOSTICS
This function enables you to view information on the Manufacturer, Model/Type, Serial Number and Software
Version.
This displays the information and signal strength of the tuned *MUX.
This displays the signal information and service name of the selected MUX.
(*MUX: A higher directory of channels in digital broadcasting (a single MUX contains multiple channels.))
Engineering Diagnostics
SETUP
Move
Manufacturer : LG Electronics Inc.
Model/Type : 42LH7000
Serial No. : SKJY1107
Software Version : V1.10.00
OK
Auto Tuning
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
Manual Tuning
D
CH 30
CH 34
Programme Edit
Software Update
: On
Diagnostics
CH 36
CI Information
CH 38
CH 54
CH 60
E
Prev.
1 MENU
Exit
Select D i a g n o s t i c s.
OK
OK
MENU
Select S E T U P.
2
3
Popup
Display Manufacturer, Model/Type, Serial Number and Software Version.
4
OK
Display the information of Channel.
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
76
CI [COMMON INTERFACE] INFORMATION
This function enables you to watch some encrypted services (pay services). If you remove the CI Module, you cannot watch pay services.
When the module is inserted into the CI slot, you can access the module menu.
To purchase a module and smart card, contact your dealer. Do not repeatedly insert or remove a CI module from
the TV. This may cause a malfunction. When the TV is turned on after inserting a CI Module, you may not have any
sound output.
This may be incompatible with the CI module and smart card.
CI (Common Interface) functions may not be possible depending upon the country broadcasting circumstances.
Move
Viaccess Module
OK
Consultations
Auto Tuning
Authorizations
Manual Tuning
Module information
Programme Edit
Software Update
: On
Diagnostics
CI Information
Select the item
• This OSD is only for illustration and the menu options
and screen format will vary according to the Digital pay
services provider.
• It is possible for you to change CI (Common Interface)
menu screen and service by consulting your dealer.
1 MENU
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
i
SETUP
Select S E T U P.
2
OK
Select C I I n f o r m a t i o n.
OK
Select the desired item: Module information, smart card
information, language, or software download etc.
3
4
OK
Save.
• Press the R E T U R N button to return to normal TV viewing.
77
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
SELECTING THE PROGRAMME LIST
You can check which programmes are stored in the memory by displaying the programme list.
Mini Glossary
Programme List
Displayed when the
Locked Programme.
1 BBC
2 BBC
3 BBC
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
Exit
1Displaying programme LIST
A
Display the Programme List.
LIST
A
2
Select a programme.
OK
TV/RAD
The mode will be switched between
TV, DTV, and Radio from the program
you are currently watching.
Switch to the chosen programme number.
Paging through a programme list
1
P
78
have been set up to be skipped by auto programming or in the programme edit mode.
• Some programmes with the channel number
shown in the programme LIST indicate there is
no station name assigned.
Selecting a programme in the programme list
1
A
• You may find some blue programmes. These
P
A
G
E
Turn the pages.
2
LIST
Return to normal TV viewing.
FAVOURITE PROGRAMME SETUP
A
Selecting favourite programme
Favorite programmes is a convenient feature that lets you quickly scan up to programmes of your choice without
having to wait for the TV to scan through all the in-between programmes.
F
G
Favourite
F
Favourite
(Except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**,
32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, 19/22/26LG31**,
19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 19/22/26/32LD3**,
32/37/42/47LH3***, 32/42/47LF51**)
1
P
or
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
2Q. MENU
G
(Only 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**,
32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, 19/22/26LG31**,
19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 19/22/26/32LD3**,
32/37/42/47LH3***, 32/42/47LF51**)
3
Select your desired
programme.
4Q. MENU
Select F a v o u r i t e.
Select F a v o u r i t e .
Return to TV viewing.
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
Favourite
Favourite
• This will automatically include the selected programme into your favourite programme list.
A
Displaying the favourite programme list
Favourite List
1 MARK
1 BBC
Display the Favourite Programme List.
FAV
2 BBC
3 BBC
Exit
79
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
INPUT LIST
HDMI and AV1, 2 (SCART) can be recognized by a detect pin and thus enabled only when an external device approves voltage.
By using T V / R A D button, you can move from External Input to RF Input and to the last watched programme in DTV/RADIO/TV
mode.
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
80
Antenna
AV1
AV2
AV3
Component
HDMI4
HDMI3
HDMI2
HDMI1
RGB
(Only 32/37/42/47LH49**,
32/37/42/47/55LH50**,
32/37/42/47LH70**,
42/47LH90**, 50/60PS70**,
50/60PS80**)
(Except for 19/22LH20**, 19/22LD3**, 19/22LG31**)
(Except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22LU50**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 19/22/26/32LD3**,
32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, 26LG31**)
1
INPUT
OK
Select the input source.
• A n t e n n a or C a b l e : Select it when watching
the DTV/TV. (Digital cable input is available
only at Finland, Sweden and “--” country)
• A V 1, A V 2, A V 3 : Select it when watching the
VCR or external equipment.
• C o m p o n e n t : Select it when using the DVD or
the Digital set-top box depends on connector.
• R G B :Select it when using PC depends on connector.
• H D M I 1, H D M I 2(Except for 19/22LH20**,
19/22LD3**, 19/22LG31**), H D M I 3(Except
for 19/22LU40**, 19/22LU50**,
19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**,
19/22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42LF25**,
32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**,
26LG31**),, H D M I 4(Only
32/37/42/47LH49**,
32/37/42/47/55LH50**,
32/37/42/47LH70**, 42/47LH90**,
50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**) : Select it when
using DVD, PC or Digital set-top box depend
on connector.
DATA SERVICE
(This menu is enabled only in Ireland. )
This function allow users to choose between M H E G ( D i g i t a l T e l e t e x t ) and T e l e t e x t if both exist at the same time.
If only one of them exists, either M H E G or T e l e t e x t is enabled regardless of which option you selected.
OPTION
Move
OPTION
OK
Move
Menu Language
: English
Menu Language
: English
Audio Language
: English
Audio Language
: English
Subtitle Language
: English
Subtitle Language
Hard of Hearing(
) : Off
Hard of Hearing(
: English
) : Off
Data
Data Service
Service
:: MHEG
MHEG
Data
Data Service
Service
:: MHEG
MHEG
MHEG
Country
: Ireland
Country
: Ireland
Teletext
Input Label
OK
Input Label
SIMPLINK
: On
SIMPLINK
E
: On
E
OK
Select O P T I O N.
Select M H E G or T e l e t e x t.
4
2
OK
Select D a t a S e r v i c e.
OK
Save.
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
INPUT LABEL
Selects a label for each input source.
OPTION
Move
OK
AV1
OPTION
Move
Menu Language
: English
Menu Language
: English
Audio Language
: English
Audio Language
: English
: English
Subtitle Language
Subtitle Language
Hard of Hearing(
Country
) : Off
: UK
Hard of Hearing(
: English
) : Off
Country
: UK
Input Label
Input Label
OK
AV2
AV3
Component
RGB
HDMI1
(Except for 19/22LH20**,
19/22LD3**, 19/22LG31**)
HDMI2
SIMPLINK
: On
SIMPLINK
: On
Key Lock
: Off
Key Lock
: Off
HDMI3
HDMI4
E
E
Close
(Only 32/37/42/47LH49**,
32/37/42/47/55LH50**,
32/37/42/47LH70**, 42/47LH90**,
50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**)
1 MENU
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
3
1 MENU
(Except for 19/22LU40**,
19/22LU50**,
19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**,
19/22/26/32LD3**,
32/37/42LF25**,
32/37/42LG2***,
32/37/42LG33**, 26LG31**)
3
Select OPTION.
2
OK
Select the source.
4
OK
Select Input Label.
Select the label.
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
81
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
SIMPLE MANUAL
You can easily and effectively access the TV information by viewing a simple manual on the TV.
During the Simple Manual operation, audio will be muted.
OPTION
Move
Audio Language
Subtitle Language
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
Hard of Hearing(
Country
OK
: English
: English
) : Off
: UK
Input Label
SIMPLINK
: On
Key Lock
Simple
Simple Manual
Manual
: Off
E
1 MENU
Select OPTION.
2
OK
Select Simple Manual.
OK
Select the part of the manual you want to see.
3
• Press the R E T U R N button to return to normal TV viewing.
82
This function operates only with devices with the SIMPLINK logo.
Please check the SIMPLINK logo.
This TV might not function properly when using it with other products with HDMI-CEC function.
This allows you to control and play other AV devices connected to the display through HDMI cable without additional cables and settings.
O f f”.
If you do not want SIMPLINK menu,select “O
Move
Menu Language
OPTION
Move
Menu Language
: English
Audio Language
: English
Audio Language
: English
Subtitle Language
: English
Subtitle Language
Hard of Hearing(
Country
) : Off
: UK
Input Label
Hard of Hearing(
Country
SIMPLINK
: On
SIMPLINK
Key Lock
: Off
Key Lock
OK
: English
) : Off
: UK
Input Label
E
1 MENU
OK
: English
Off
: On
On
On
: Off
E
Select O P T I O N.
2
OK
Select S I M P L I N K.
OK
Select O n or O f f.
3
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
OPTION
4
OK
Save.
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
83
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
Connecting to Home Theater with the SIMPLINK logo.
1
Connect the H D M I / D V I I N 1, H D M I I N 2(Except for
19/22LH20**, 19/22LD3**, 19/22LG31**),, H D M I I N 3
(Except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22LU50**,
19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 19/22/26/32LD3**,
32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**,
26LG31**) or H D M I I N 4 (Only 32/37/42/47LH49**,
32/37/42/47/55LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70**,
42/47LH90**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**) terminal on the
back of the TV and the HDMI output terminal of the Home
Theater using HDMI cables.
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
2
Connect the Digital Audio output terminal on the back
of the TV and the Digital Audio input terminal of the
Home Theater using optical cables.
3
Select Home Theater in the Speaker menu by pushing
the S I M P L I N K button.
G
1
2
Home Theater
When you select or operate a media device with home theater function, the speaker automatically switches to home theater speaker
(HT speaker).
! NOTE
Connect the HDMI/DVI IN or HDMI IN terminal of the TV to the terminal (HDMI terminal) of the SIMPLINK device with
the HDMI cable.
G When you switch the Input source using the INPUT button on the remote control, you can stop the operation of a device
controlled by SIMPLINK.
G
84
SIMPLINK Functions
SIMPLINK Menu
button and then OK button to select the desired SIMPLINK source.
T V v i e w i n g : Switch to the previous TV programme
regardless of the current mode.
2
D I S C p l a y b a c k : Select and play connected discs.
When multiple discs are available, the titles of discs are
conveniently displayed at the bottom of the screen.
1
2
E
1
E
Press the
Selected Device
When device is not connected (displayed in gray)
3
5
E
H D D R e c o r d i n g s p l a y b a c k : Play and control
recordings stored in HDD.
4
E
5
When a device is connected
(displayed in bright colour)
E
4
V C R p l a y b a c k : Play and control the connected
VCR.
E
3
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
Disc playback
Control connected AV devices by pressing the
, OK, G, A, l l, FF and GG buttons.
Direct Play
After connecting AV devices to the TV, you can directly control the devices and play media without additional settings.
Select AV device
Enables you to select one of the AV devices connected to the TV and operate it.
Power off all devices
When you switch off the TV, all connected devices are turned off.
Switch audio-out
Offers an easy way to switch audio-out.
Sync Power on
When the equipment with Simplink function connected HDMI terminal starts to play, The TV will change automatically to turn
on mode.
* A device, which is connected to the TV through an HDMI cable but does not support SIMPLINK, does not provide this function.
Note: To operate SIMPLINK, an HDMI cable over Version 1.3 with *CEC function should be used. (*CEC: Consumer Electronics
Control).
Change Device
OK
Audio Out to Home theater/Audio Out to TV:
Select Home theater or TV speaker for Audio Out.
• Home theater: Only one supported at a time
• DVD, Recorder: Up to one(19/22LH20**, 19/22LD3**, 19/22LG31**), two(19/22LU40**,
19/22LU50**, 26/32/37/42LH20**, 26/32LD3**, 32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***,
32/37/42LG33**, 26LG31**), three(32/37/42/47LH3***, 32/37/42/47LH40**, 26LU50**,
32/42/47LF51**, 42/50PQ35**, 42PQ65**, 50PS65**) or four(32/37/42/47LH49**,
32/37/42/47/55LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70**, 42/47LH90**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**)
supported at a time.
• VCR: Only one supported at a time
85
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
AV MODE
You can select the optimal images and sounds when connecting AV devices to external input.
Off
Cinema
Sport
Game
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
1AV MODE
Disables the AV MODE.
Optimizes video and audio for watching movies.
Optimizes video and audio for watching sports events.
Optimizes video and audio for playing games.
Off
Cinema
Game
Sport
Press the AV MODE button repeatedly to select the desired source.
2
OK
• If you select C i n e m a in AV mode, C i n e m a will be selected both for
P i c t u r e M o d e and S o u n d M o d e in P I C T U R E menu and A U D I O
menu respectively.
O f f” in AV mode, the picture and image which you ini• If you select “O
tially set will be selected.
86
INITIALIZING
(RESET TO ORIGINAL FACTORY SETTINGS)
This function initializes all settings.
D a y and
N i g h t of the P i c t u r e M o d e cannot be initialized.
But the settings of
It is useful to initialize the product or when you move to other city or country.
When the Factory Reset is completed, you must restart the Initializing setup.
O n", the message to enter the password appears.
When the L o c k S y s t e m menu is "O
Move
OK
OPTION
E
: On
SIMPLINK
: On
Key Lock
: Off
Key Lock
: Off
Set ID
Simple Manual
:1
Power Indicator
Demo Mode
: On
Mode Setting
: Store Demo
Factory Reset
Factory
Reset
2
OK
OK
E
SIMPLINK
Simple Manual
1 MENU
Move
Select O P T I O N.
Set ID
: 1 settings and channel
All user
Power Indicatorsettings will be reset. Still
Demo Mode Continue?
: On
Mode Setting
Factory
FactoryReset
Reset
: Store Demo
Yes
No
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL
OPTION
O n", if you forget your password,
• In L o c k S y s t e m "O
press '7', '7', '7', '7' on the remote control handset.
Select F a c t o r y R e s e t.
3
OK
Select Y e s.
OK
Start Factory Reset.
4
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
87
TO USE THE BLUETOOTH
(Only 32/37/42/47LH70**, 42/47LH90**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**)
Bluetooth?
Bluetooth is a short distance networking technology using 2.4 GHz frequency to connect various types of information devices such as computers, cell phones and PDAs, as well as digital appliances through wireless connection, without having to connect any cable, to enable data exchange.
With the Bluetooth communication function, you can connect the Bluetooth enabled wireless headset or receive
images(only JPEG), listen to music from the Bluetooth enabled cell phone using this TV.
• Communication Spec.: Bluetooth Specification Version 2.0 + EDR (Enhanced Data Rate)
• Output: Bluetooth Specification Power Class 2
• Maximum Communication Range: Line of open sight approx. 10 m (30 ft)
• Frequency Band: 2.4 GHz band (2.4 GHz to 2.4835 GHz)
• Bluetooth Module: EAX57538201 (LG Electronics)
• Compatible Bluetooth Profile : GAVDP(Generic Audio/Video Distribution Profile)
A2DP(Advanced Audio Distribution Profile)
HSP(Headset Profile)
OPP(Object Push Profile)
BIP(Basic Imaging Profile)
FTP(File Transfer Profile)
TO USE THE BLUETOOTH
Precautions when using the Bluetooth
Use within 10 m(-45° to 45°) range.
If you use the device out of the range or within the range with obstacles, it can result in communication error.
G Communication error can occur depending on the surrounding devices.
G Products using the same frequency of 2.4 GHz (Wireless LAN, microwave oven etc.), can cause communication error by using the same frequency bandwidth.
G The device search time differs depending on the number of Bluetooth devices and the operating situation.
G The probability of search increases with less number of devices.
G Electromagnetic wave can be interfered with applicable wireless devices.
G Because applicable wireless devices have the possibility of electromagnetic wave interference, they cannot
provide services related to human life.
G You can only connect one Bluetooth device at a time.
G You cannot receive photos(only JPEG) or listen to music from other Bluetooth devices while using the
Bluetooth headset.
For
details of Bluetooth, refer to the user manual of the Bluetooth device.
G
G USB (Photo List, Music List, Movie List(Only 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47/55LH50**,
32/37/42/47LH70**, 42/47LH90**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**, 42/50PQ35**, 42PQ65**,
50PS65**)) and Bluetooth will not be supported at the same time.
G Operation is subject to the following two conditions : (1) This device may not cause (harmful) interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation (of the device).
G
QDID(Qualified Design Identity) : B014836
88
0678
SETTING THE BLUETOOTH
If you want to listen to the broadcasted sound using the Bluetooth headset or receive the jpeg images from an
external device and view them on the TV, listen to music from cell phone(Bluetooth device), you can use the
wireless communication without having to connect any cables.
O n”.
You can use the BLUETOOTH menu by selecting “O
O f f”.
If you do not want to use the Bluetooth function, select “O
If it is connected to the external Bluetooth device, you can select “Off” after disconnecting the device.
BLUETOOTH
Move
Bluetooth
: Off
TV PIN
: 0000
OK
BLUETOOTH
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
TV PIN
Move
OK
Off
::Off
Off
On
:On
0000
Bluetooth Headset : Disconnected
Registered Bluetooth Device
Registered Bluetooth Device
My Bluetooth Info.
My Bluetooth Info.
1 MENU
Select B L U E T O O T H.
TO USE THE BLUETOOTH
Bluetooth Headset : Disconnected
2
OK
Select B l u e t o o t h.
OK
Select O n or O f f.
3
4
OK
Save.
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
89
TO USE THE BLUETOOTH
SET TV PIN
To accept connection from an external Bluetooth device or to connect to an external Bluetooth device, the PIN
needs to be entered.
For details on how to set the PIN of the external Bluetooth device, refer to the user manual of the applicable
device.
The TV PIN is composed of numbers of up to 10 digits.
The TV PIN must have more than 1 digit.
BLUETOOTH
Move
OK
BLUETOOTH
Move
Bluetooth
: Off
Bluetooth
: Off
TV PIN
: 0000
TV PIN
PIN
TV
0000
:: 0000
OK
Set TV PIN
Bluetooth Headset : Disconnected
Registered Bluetooth Device
Registered Bluetooth Device
My Bluetooth Info.
My Bluetooth Info.
E
TO USE THE BLUETOOTH
Bluetooth Headset : Disconnected
0 0 0 0_
Delete
OK
1 MENU
Select B L U E T O O T H.
2
OK
3
OK
• Press the
button to delete digits
one by one.
Select T V P I N.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Select the desired PIN number.
0
4
OK
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
90
BLUETOOTH HEADSET
When you select the Bluetooth headset, you can listen to the TV sound in the Bluetooth headset through wireless communication.
You must pair it with any new Bluetooth device before the first use. For details, refer to the user manual of the applicable device.
A maximum of 12 devices can be paired.
When the unit is searching for the Bluetooth headset, other buttons except for the “Stop” (OK button) do not work.
Connecting a new Bluetooth headset
You can only search for the new Bluetooth headset only in the D i s c o n n e c t e d condition.
When you run the search, it will show you the list of all Bluetooth headsets responding.
After new Bluetooth device is searched, the PIN number is validated to connect the device. For details, refer to
the user manual of the applicable device.
When selecting Cable (DVB cable mode) if Finland, Sweden or “--” country is chosen, you cannot hear stereo
sound through the Bluetooth headset.
1 MENU
4
Select B L U E T O O T H.
OK
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
7
0
2
OK
Select Bluetooth headset PIN number.
Refer to the user manual of the applicable device for the PIN number.
5
OK
Select B l u e t o o t h H e a d s e t.
Connect the Bluetooth headset.
TO USE THE BLUETOOTH
*When selecting Cable (DVB cable mode) if Finland, Sweden or “--” country is chosen.
1. A Bluetooth headset is disconnected if there is any.
2. All headset device lists are deleted.
3. Bluetooth mode is turned off.
4. When trying to connect with a stereo-only headset, “Invalid format” will be displayed.
3
OK
GREEN Search the Bluetooth headset.
Connecting to Bluetooth headset already registered
Bluetooth headsets are listed in the order most recently used with the headset currently in use listed at the top.
When connecting to the Bluetooth device already registered, you can select and connect directly without any PIN validation.
1 MENU
Select B L U E T O O T H.
2
OK
Select B l u e t o o t h H e a d s e t.
4
OK
Message asking to connect the selected
Bluetooth headset will be displayed.
Select Y e s or N o.
5
OK
Connect the Bluetooth headset.
3
OK
Select the desired Bluetooth headset.
• After connecting/using the Bluetooth headset, the headset setting will be the D i s c o n n e c t e d condition automatically
when you turn off the power of the TV and then turn on.
• After connecting the Bluetooth headset, the TV speaker is switched to Mute condition and the sound will only be generated from the headset.
91
TO USE THE BLUETOOTH
Disconnecting the Bluetooth headset during use
1 MENU
3
Select B L U E T O O T H.
OK
Disconnect the Bluetooth headset.
2
OK
OK
Select B l u e t o o t h H e a d s e t.
When requesting to connect to TV from the Bluetooth headset
TO USE THE BLUETOOTH
92
When the Bluetooth menu is "On" and there is a connection request from
the headset, this message is dispalyed.
Not all headsets support the this feature.(Refer to the user manual of the
applicable Bluetooth headset.)
Some headset types may make an attempt at connection when they
are turned off/on even though they are not included in the
Registered Device list.
1
OK
Do you want to connect your headset?
Yes
No
Select Y e s or N o.
! NOTE
LG recommends the following headset models.
-Mono/Stereo : Nokia : BH501 / Jabra : BT620s /
Sony : DR-BT30Q / Philips : SHB7100 /
Plantronics : Pulsar590 / Motorola : HT820 /
Motorola : S9 / LG : HBS200
-Only Stereo : Logitech : Freepulse-wireless
-Only Mono : Motorola : H800 / Jabra : BT250v /
Jabra : BT2040 / Plantronics : Discovery665 /
Nokia : BH-900 / Sony Ericsson : HBH-GV435 /
Samsung : WEP500 / LG: Prada HBM-510
There might be an audio delay, depending on the buffer
memory size of the headset.
G The stereo/mono headset officially certified to be
Bluetooth compatible can be searched and connected.
G The stereo/mono headset that supports the A2DP or HSP
function among the Bluetooth devices can be connected.
G If the surrounding environment of the TV is as follows,
the device may not be searched or connected properly.
-If there is strong electromagnetic wave.
-If there are many Bluetooth devices.
-If the headset is turned off, not in place or has an error.
-Because products such as microwave oven, wireless LAN,
plasma light, gas range etc., use the same frequency
range, it can cause communication error.
G
Only one Bluetooth headset can be connected at once.
G Connection that is lost due to the TV being turned off
etc. will not be automatically recovered. Try connecting
the applicable device again.
G Some operations can be slower while operating the headset.
G Even if you choose simplink Home Theater after using the
headset during Simplink operation, the unit will not automatically switch to Home Theater speakers.
G When the headset connection continuously fails, pair the
device one more time.
G The audio quality of mono headsets will not be as
good as that for stereo headsets.
G Mono headsets may suffer from noise as the distance
from the TV increases, because they use a different
transmission method compared with stereo headsets.
G When a Bluetooth headset is in use, the Volume
+/- and Mute keys do not work, and the Audio
menu returns to the default value and is disabled.
G With Bluetooth set to On, if any registered devices
are turned on, the TV will switch to Bluetooth
mode automatically even though you are watching
in another input mode. In this case, set Bluetooth
to Off.
G
MANAGING REGISTERED BLUETOOTH DEVICE
If there are no devices registered, Registered Bluetooth Device menu will be deactivated and cannot be used.
When 12 devices are registered, you cannot register any more devices, and the external device will no longer be
able to pair up with the TV. In this case, you should delete one (disconnect first if a device is connected to the
TV) and then you can register another device.
BLUETOOTH
Move
Bluetooth
: Off
TV PIN
: 0000
OK
Bluetooth Headset : Disconnected
Bluetooth Device
Device
Registered Bluetooth
My Bluetooth Info.
BLUETOOTH
Move
OK
Bluetooth
: Off
Registered Bluetooth Device
TV PIN
: 0000
00:0d:44:84:14:62
Bluetooth Headset : Disconnected
Registered Bluetooth
Bluetooth Device
Device
Registered
FreePulse_Wireless
My Bluetooth Info.
LG L600V
Connect
Select B L U E T O O T H.
2
OK
3
OK
A
Select R e g i s t e r e d B l u e t o o t h D e v i c e.
Check the registered Bluetooth device.
Connecting the registered Bluetooth headset
1
TO USE THE BLUETOOTH
1 MENU
Delete
Select the registered Bluetooth headset you want to connect.
2
BLUE Message asking to connect the selected Bluetooth headset will be displayed.
3
OK
A
Select Y e s or N o.
Deleting registered Bluetooth device
"Delete" will be available when selecting the device that is not connected to the TV.
1
Select the Bluetooth device you want to remove.
2
RED Message asking to delete the selected Bluetooth device will be displayed.
3
OK
A
Select Y e s or N o.
Disconnecting registered Bluetooth device
"Disconnect" will be available when selecting the device that is connected to the TV.
1
Select the Bluetooth device that is currently connected to the TV.
2
BLUE Disconnect the Bluetooth device.
93
TO USE THE BLUETOOTH
MY BLUETOOTH INFORMATION
This function provides the My Bluetooth Information to the user.
"Edit" will be available when TV is not connected with any device.
You can edit the My Device Name.
You can check the My Device Address.
BLUETOOTH
Move
OK
BLUETOOTH
Move
Bluetooth
: Off
Bluetooth
: Off
TV PIN
: 0000
TV PIN
: 0000
OK
Bluetooth Headset : Disconnected
Bluetooth Headset : Disconnected
Registered Bluetooth Device
Registered BluetoothMy
Device
Device Name
My Bluetooth Info.
My
My Bluetooth
Bluetooth Info.
Info.
5 0 P S 7 0 0 0 - Z A
TO USE THE BLUETOOTH
My Device Address
0 0 : 0 5 : c 9 : f f : 0 0 f : 0 7
Edit
1 MENU
Select B L U E T O O T H.
2
Select M y B l u e t o o t h I n f o ..
OK
3
OK
OK
BLUE
You can use an the alphabet A to Z , the number 0
to 9 , +/ -, and blank.
4
OK
Save.
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
94
RECEIVING PHOTOS FROM EXTERNAL BLUETOOTH DEVICE
For details on how to send photos(only JPEG) from the external Bluetooth device to TV, refer to the user manual
of the applicable device.
Receiving
file(s)
F
1/3
G
E
Close
• When you select C l o s e with the
button, the OSD will disappear.
And when you press the OK button again, it will appear again.
■
(Rotate) : Rotate photos.
Rotates the photo 90° clockwise upon O K button on
(Rotate).
• The maximum accumulated size of the image(s) that can be received is 10MBytes.
• You cannot receive the image(s) while using the Bluetooth headset.
• You cannot receive the image(s) while listening to music from Bluetooth device.
• When the external Bluetooth device is currently sending the photo, press the R E T U R N button to stop
TO USE THE BLUETOOTH
Select the desired photos.
receiving the photo. All photos already received will be deleted as a result.
• With some Bluetooth devices, you may not be able to transmit an image (JPEG) file to the TV set.
LISTENING TO THE MUSICS FROM EXTERNAL BLUETOOTH DEVICE
For details on how to listen to the musics from the external Bluetooth device to TV, refer to the user manual of
the applicable device.
You should use the Bluetooth device supporting A2DP(as external device)
• With some Bluetooth devices, you may not be able to listen to music via the TV speaker system.
Listening to bluetooth music
Back to TV
+ or - button to adjust the volume.
• Press the
• If you wish to switch the sound off, press the MUTE button.
• Press the R E T U R N button to return to normal TV viewing.
! NOTE
G
G
You cannot listen to music while using the Bluetooth headset.
You cannot listen to music while receiving image(s).
95
TO USE A USB DEVICE
G It is not possible to use USB function in 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**,
19/22/26LG31**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 19/22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42/47LH3***, 32/42/47LF51** models.
When connecting a USB device
When you connect a USB device, this pop up menu is displayed, automatically.
“POP UP MENU” will not be displayed while the OSD including Menu, EPG or Schedule list is activated or
while the Bluetooth Headset is connected.
When the Pop Up menu does not appear, you can select Music List, Photo List or Movie List(Only
32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47/55LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70**, 42/47LH90**, 50/60PS70**,
50/60PS80**, 42/50PQ35**, 42PQ65**, 50PS65**) in the USB menu.
In USB device, you can not add a new folder or delete the existing folder.
1 Connect the USB device to the U S B
I N jack
on the TV.
• Only photo(JPEG), music (MP3) and movie(DAT, MPG, MPEG, VOB,
AVI, DIVX, MP4, MKV, TS, TRP, TP) (Only 32/37/42/47LH49**,
32/37/42/47/55LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70**, 42/47LH90**,
50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**, 42/50PQ35**, 42PQ65**,
50PS65**) are supported.
When removing the USB device
USB memory stick
Select P H O T O L I S T, M U S I C L I S T or M O V I E
L I S T(Only 32/37/42/47LH49**,
32/37/42/47/55LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70**,
42/47LH90**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**,
42/50PQ35**, 42PQ65**, 50PS65**).
2
TO USE A USB DEVICE
96
3
Select the USB Device menu before removing the
USB device.
1Q. MENU
Select Eject.
2
OK
PHOTO LIST
MUSIC LIST
MOVIE LIST
OK
Precautions when using the USB device
G Only a USB storage device is recognizable.
G If the USB storage device is connected through a USB hub, the device is not recognizable.
G A USB storage device using an automatic recognition programme may not be recognized.
G A USB storage device which uses its own driver may not be recognized.
G The recognition speed of a USB storage device may depend on each device.
G Please do not turn off the TV or unplug the USB device when the connected USB storage device is
working. When such
device is suddenly separated or unplugged, the stored files or the USB storage device may be damaged.
G Please do not connect the USB storage device which was artificially maneuvered on the PC. The device may
cause the product to malfunction or fail to be played. Never forget to use only a USB storage device which has
normal music files, image files or movie files.
G Please use only a USB storage device which was formatted as a FAT32 file system, NTFS file system provided with
the Windows operating system. In case of a storage device formatted as a different utility programme which is
not supported by Windows, it may not be recognized.
G Please connect power to a USB storage device(over 0.5 A) which requires an external power supply. If not, the
device may not be recognized.
G Please connect a USB storage device with the cable offered by the device maker.
G Some USB storage devices may not be supported or operated smoothly.
G File alignment method of USB storage device is similar to Window XP and filename can recognize up to 100 English characters.
G Be sure to back up important files since data stored in a USB memory device may be damaged. We will not be
responsible for any data loss.
G If the USB HDD does not have an external power source, the USB device may not be detected. So be sure to
connect the external power source.
- Please use a power adaptor for an external power source. We do not guarantee an USB cable for an external
power source.
G Data in a USB storage device cannot be deleted in the NTFS file system.
G If your USB memory device has multiple partitions, or if you use a USB multi-card reader, you can use up to 4
partitions or USB memory devices.
G Only the FAT32 file system supports the delete function.
G If a USB memory device is connected to a USB multi-card reader, its volume data may not be detected.
G If the USB memory device does not work properly, disconnect and reconnect it.
G How fast a USB memory device is detected differs from device to device.
G If the USB is connected in Standby Mode, specific hard disk will automatically be loaded when the TV is turned on.
G The recommended capacity is 1 TB or less for a USB external hard disk and 32 GB or less for USB memory.
G Any device with more than the recommended capacity may not work properly.
G If a USB external hard disk with a "Energy Saving" function does not work, turn the hard disk off and on again to
make it work properly.
G USB storage devices below USB 2.0 are supported as well. But they may not work properly in the movie list.
! NOTE
■
Image shown may differ from your TV.
G In order to avoid losing the USB memory stick, use
the USB connector(sold separately) to fix the USB
memory stick to the USB connector holder of the TV.
(Plasma TV only)
USB connector holder
USB Input
Port
USB Connector (sold separately)
- Fix the one end of the USB connector to
the USB memory stick and the other end
to the USB connector holder.
PHOTO LIST
PHOTO(*.JPEG) supporting file
Baseline : 64 x 64 to 15360 x 8640
Progressive : 64 x 64 to 1920 x 1440
• You can play JPEG files only.
• Non-supported files are displayed in the form of predefined icon.
TO USE A USB DEVICE
You can view photo files on USB storage device.
The On Screen Display may be different from your TV. Images are an example to assist with the TV operation.
When you are watching the photo by the Photo List function, you can not change the picture mode.
Screen Components
1 MENU
2
OK
Select U S B.
Select Photo List.
OK
2
1
Moves to upper level folder
2
Current page/Total pages
3
Total number of marked photos
4
Photo List
Page 2/3
Drive1
JMJ001
Corresponding buttons on the
remote control
Up Folder
Navigation
No Marked
Up Folder
1366x768, 125KB
1
3
Popup Menu
4
KY103
09/10/2008
KY101
09/10/2008
KY104
09/10/2008
KY102
09/10/2008
KY105
09/10/2008
JMJ001
09/10/2008
JMJ005
09/10/2008
JMJ002
09/10/2008
JMJ006
09/10/2008
JMJ003
09/10/2008
JMJ007
09/10/2008
JMJ004
09/10/2008
JMJ008
09/10/2008
Page Change
MARK
Mark
Exit
97
TO USE A USB DEVICE
Photo Selection and PopUp Menu
Photo List
Page 2/3
Drive1
No Marked
Up Folder
KR103
09/10/2008
KR101
09/10/2008
KR104
09/10/2008
KR102
09/10/2008
KR105
09/10/2008
JMJ001
09/10/2008
JMJ005
09/10/2008
JMJ002
09/10/2008
JMJ006
09/10/2008
JMJ003
09/10/2008
JMJ007
09/10/2008
JMJ004
09/10/2008
JMJ008
09/10/2008
JMJ001
1366x768, 125KB
Up Folder
Navigation
Popup Menu
TO USE A USB DEVICE
Photo List
Page 2/3
Drive1
Page Change
MARK
KR101
Up Folder
Navigation
1
Popup Menu
Exit
No Marked
Up Folder
JMJ001
1366x768, 125KB
Mark
09/10/2008
KR103
09/10/2008
KR104
09/10/2008
1366x768, 125KB
KR102
09/10/2008
KR105
09/10/2008
JMJ001
View
09/10/2008
JMJ005
09/10/2008
Mark All
JMJ002
09/10/2008
JMJ006
09/10/2008
JMJ003
09/10/2008
JMJ007
09/10/2008
JMJ004
09/10/2008
JMJ008
09/10/2008
Delete
Close
Page Change
MARK
Mark
Exit
G
View : Display the selected item.
Mark All : Mark all photos on the screen.
Unmark All : Deselect all marked photos.
G D e l e t e or Delete Marked(FAT32 file system only)
: Delete the selected photo item.
G C l o s e : Close the pop-up menu.
G
G
Select the target folder or drive.
• Use the P
2
3
4
Select the desired photos.
OK
OK
Show the PopUp menu.
OK
Select the desired PopUp menu.
button to navigation in the
photo page.
• Use the M A R K button to mark or unmark a
photo. When one or more photos are marked,
you can view each marked photo or a slide
show of the marked photos. If no photos are
marked, you can view every individual photo in
the folder or a slide show of all photos in the
folder.
• Press the R E T U R N button to return to normal TV viewing.
98
How to view photo
Detailed operations are available on full-sized photo view screen.
Photo List
Page 2/3
Drive1
No Marked
Up Folder
KR103
09/10/2008
KR101
09/10/2008
KR104
09/10/2008
KR102
09/10/2008
KR105
09/10/2008
JMJ001
09/10/2008
JMJ005
09/10/2008
JMJ002
09/10/2008
JMJ006
09/10/2008
JMJ003
09/10/2008
JMJ007
09/10/2008
JMJ004
09/10/2008
JMJ008
09/10/2008
JMJ001
1366x768, 125KB
Up Folder
Navigation
Popup Menu
Page 2/3
Drive1
MARK
JMJ001
KR101
Up Folder
Navigation
1
Popup Menu
Exit
No Marked
Up Folder
1366x768, 125KB
Mark
09/10/2008
KR103
09/10/2008
KR104
09/10/2008
1366x768, 125KB
KR102
09/10/2008
KR105
09/10/2008
JMJ001
View
09/10/2008
JMJ005
09/10/2008
JMJ002
09/10/2008
JMJ006
09/10/2008
JMJ003
09/10/2008
JMJ007
09/10/2008
JMJ004
09/10/2008
JMJ008
09/10/2008
Mark All
Delete
Close
Page Change
MARK
Mark
Select the target folder or drive.
Exit
1/17
Slideshow
BGM
Delete
Option
Hide
The aspect ratio of a photo may change the size of the photo displayed on the screen in full size.
Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
• Use the P
TO USE A USB DEVICE
Photo List
Page Change
button to navigation in the
photo page.
2
3
OK
OK
4
5
Select the desired photos.
Show the PopUp menu.
Select V i e w.
OK
The selected photo is displayed in
full size.
99
TO USE A USB DEVICE
6
OK
Select the Slideshow , B G M,
D e l e t e , Option or H i d e.
• Use
(Rotate),
button to select the previous or
next photo.
1/17
Slideshow
BGM
Delete
Option
Hide
• Use
button to select and control the
menu on the full-sized screen.
TO USE A USB DEVICE
G
S l i d e s h o w : When no picture is selected, all photos in the current
folder are displayed during slide show. If some photos are selected,
those photos are displayed in a slide show.
■ Set the time interval of the slide show in O p t i o n.
G
B G M (Background Music) : Listen to music while viewing photos in
full size.
■ Set the Music Folder for BGM in Options before using this function.
G
( R o t a t e ) : Rotate photos.
Rotates the photo 90°, 180°, 270°, 360° clockwise.
■ It can not be rotate when the width of a picture is bigger than
supported height.
■
G
D e l e t e (FAT32 file system only) : Delete photos.
G
O p t i o n : Set values for S l i d e S p e e d and M u s i c F o l d e r for
B G M.
■ Use
button and O K button to set values. Then go to
OK
and press O K to save the settings.
■ You cannot change M u s i c F o l d e r while BGM is playing.
Press F G to set the time interval between slides.
Slide Speed
Fast
Music Folder
Music
OK
G
100
H i d e : Hide the menu on the full-sized screen.
■ To see the menu again on the full-sized screen, press O K button
to display.
Cancel
MUSIC LIST
You can play music files on USB storage device.
Purchased music files(*.MP3) may contain copyright restrictions. Playback of these files may not be supported by this model.
Music file on your USB device can be played by this unit.
The On Screen Display may be different from your TV. Images are an example to assist with the TV operation.
MUSIC (*.MP3) supporting file
Bit rate 32 to 320
• Sampling rate MPEG1 Layer3 : 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz
• Sampling rate MPEG2 Layer3 : 16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz
• Sampling rate MPEG2.5 Layer3 : 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz
TO USE A USB DEVICE
Screen Components
1 MENU
2
OK
Select U S B.
Select Music List.
OK
3
1
2
Preview: If any album jacket
for the file(Album Art Image)
exists, this jacket is displayed.
Moves to upper level folder
3
Current page/Total pages
4
Total number of marked music
title
5
Music List
1
Page 2/3
No Marked
Music
Title
S003
Duration
Up Folder
S001
S002
00:00/01:34
Corresponding buttons on
the remote control
4
2
Up Folder
Navigation
Popup Menu
S003
01:34
S004
03:23
S005
04:28
Page Change
MARK
Mark
Exit
5
101
TO USE A USB DEVICE
Music Selection and PopUp Menu
As shown, up to 6 music titles are listed per page.
Music List
Music
S003
Duration
Title
Up Folder
S001
S002
00:00/01:34
TO USE A USB DEVICE
Music
S003
3
4
03:23
04:28
Page Change
MARK
Mark
Exit
No Marked
Page 2/3
Title
4395KB
1Kbps
Up Folder
Play
S001
Play with Photo
S002
Mark All
S003
Delete
00:00/01:34
S004
Close
Up Folder
S005
Navigation
2
01:34
Popup Menu
Music List
1
S003
S004
S005
Up Folder
Navigation
Popup Menu
04:28
Page Change
MARK
Mark
Select the target folder or drive.
Select the desired music title
OK
OK
Show the PopUp menu.
OK
P l a y (During stop) : Play the selected music
titles.
One playback of a piece of music finishes, the
next selected one will be played. When there
are no selected music titles to play, the next
one in the current folder will be played. If you
go to a different folder and press the O K button, the current music in playback will stop.
G P l a y M a r k e d : Play the selected music titles.
Once a music finishes playing, the next selected one will be played automatically.
G S t o p P l a y (During playback) : Stop the playing music titles.
G P l a y w i t h P h o t o : Start playing the selected
music titles and then move to the Photo List.
G M a r k A l l : Mark all music titles in the folder.
G U n m a r k A l l : Deselect all marked music titles.
G D e l e t e or Delete Marked(FAT32 file system only)
: Delete the selected music titles.
G C l o s e : Close the pop-up menu.
G
No Marked
Page 2/3
Exit
• Use the P
button to navigate up/down
in the music page.
• Use M A R K button to mark or unmark a music.
When one or more music files are marked, the
marked music title will be played in sequence.
For example, if you want to listen to only one
music repeatedly, just mark the music only and
play it. If no music is marked, all the music in
the folder will be played in sequence.
Select the desired PopUp menu.
• Press the R E T U R N button to return to normal TV viewing.
102
■
If you don't press any button for a while during the playing, the play information box (as shown in the below) will
float as a screen saver.
■
The ‘Screen Saver’?
Screen saver is to prevent screen pixel damage due to an
fixed image remaining on the screen for a extended period
of time.
! NOTE
TO USE A USB DEVICE
When a music file is played,
is displayed behind the title.
G A damaged or corrupted music does not play but displays 00:00 in playtime.
G A music downloaded from a paid service with copyright protection does not start but displays inappropriate information in playtime.
G If you press O K, A buttons, screen saver is stopped.
G The P L A Y ( G) , P a u s e ( I I ) , A, GG, FF buttons on the remote control are also available in this mode.
G You can use the GG button to select the next music and the FF button to select the previous music.
G
103
TO USE A USB DEVICE
MOVIE LIST(Only 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47/55LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70**,
42/47LH90**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**, 42/50PQ35**, 42PQ65**, 50PS65**)
You can play movie files on a USB storage device.
The movie list is activated once USB is detected. It is used when playing movie files on TV.
Displays the movies in the USB folder and supports Play.
Allows playback of all movies in the folder and user desired files.
It is a movie list that displays folder information and movie file.
The On Screen Display may be different from your TV. Images are an example to assist with the TV operation.
TO USE A USB DEVICE
Movie(*.dat/*.mpg/*.mpeg/*.ts/*.trp/*.tp/*.vob/*.mp4/*.mkv/*.avi/*.divx) supporting file
Video format :DivX3.11, DivX4.12, DivX5.x, DivX6, Xvid1.00, Xvid1.01, Xvid1.02, Xvid1.03, Xvid 1.10beta-1/beta-2, Mpeg-1, Mpeg-2, Mpeg-4, H.264/AVC
Audio format : Dolby Digital, Mpeg, MP3, LPCM
Bit rate : within 32 kbps to 320 kbps (MP3)
Subtitle format : *.smi/*.srt/*.sub(MicroDVD, SubViewer1.0/2.0)/*.ass/*.ssa/*.txt(TMPlayer)/*.psb(PowerDivx)
• Some user-created subtitles may not work properly.
• Some special characters are not supported in subtitles.
• HTML tags are not supported in subtitles.
• Subtitles in languages other than the supported languages are not available.
• Time information in an external subtitle file should be arranged in ascending order to be played.
• The screen may suffer temporary interruptions (image stoppage, faster playback, etc.) when the audio language is changed.
• A damaged movie file may not be played correctly, or some player functions may not be usable.
• Movie files produced with some encoders may not be played correctly.
• If the video and audio structure of recorded file is not interleaved, either video or audio is outputted.
• HD videos with a maximum of 1920x1080@25/30P or 1280x720@50/60P are supported, depending on the frame.
• Videos with resolutions higher than 1920X1080@25/30P or 1280x720@50/60P may not work properly
depending on the frame.
• Movie files other than the specified types and formats may not work properly.
• Max bitrate of playable movie file is 20 Mbps.
• We do not guarantee smooth playback of profiles encoded level 4.1 or higher in H.264/AVC.
• DTS Audio codec is not supported.
• A movie file more than 30GB in file size is not supported for playback.
• A DivX movie file and its subtitle file must be located in the same folder.
• A video file name and its subtitle file name must be identical for it to be displayed.
• Playing a video via a USB connection that doesn’t support high speed may not work properly..
• Files encoded with GMC(Global Motion Compensation) may not be played.
• When you are watching the movie by Movie List function, you can adjust an image by E n e r g y S a v i n g and
A V M o d e key on the remote control. User setup for each image mode does not operate.
File
Extension name
mpg, mpeg, vob
dat
Video Decoder
Audio Codec
MPEG1, MPEG2
Dolby Digital,MPEG,MP3,LPCM
MPEG1
Dolby Digital,MPEG,MP3,LPCM
ts,trp,tp
MPEG2, H.264/AVC
mp4
MPEG4 SP, MPEG4 ASP, Divx 3.11, Dvix 4.12, Dvix 5.x
Dvix 6, Xvid 1.00, Xvid 1.01, Xvid 1.02, Xvid 1.03
Max Resolution
Dolby Digital,MPEG
Dolby Digital,
MPEG,MP3,LPCM
Xvid 1.10–beta 1, Xvid 1.10-beta 2, H.264/AVC
avi
MPEG 2, MPEG 4 SP, MPEG4 ASP, Divx 3.11, Divx 4, Divx 5, Divx 6
Dolby Digital,MPEG, MP3,LPCM
Xvid 1.00, Xvid 1.01, Xvid 1.02, Xvid 1.03, Xvid 1.10–beta 1
Xvid 1.10–beta 2, H.264/AVC
mkv
divx
H.264/AVC, MPEG 1, MPEG 2, MPEG 4 SP , MPEG4 ASP
MPEG 2, MPEG 4 SP, MPEG4 ASP, Divx 3.11, Divx 4, Divx 5, Divx 6
Xvid 1.00, Xvid 1.01, Xvid 1.02, Xvid 1.03, Xvid 1.10–beta 1
Xvid 1.10–beta 2, H.264/AVC
104
Dolby Digital, MPEG, MP3, LPCM
Dolby Digital,MPEG, MP3,LPCM
1920x1080@30p
Screen Components
1 MENU
2
Select U S B.
OK
Select Movie List.
OK
2
1
Moves to upper level folder
2
Current page/Total pages
3
Total number of marked movie
title
4
Movie List
3
Page 2/3
movie
M003
No Marked
Title
Duration
Up Folder
Corresponding buttons on
the remote control
M001
M002
M003
640x480, 720KB
Up Folder
Navigation
M005
Popup Menu
4
Page Change
MARK
Mark
Exit
TO USE A USB DEVICE
1
M004
105
TO USE A USB DEVICE
Movie Selection and PopUp Menu
Movie List
No Marked
Page 2/3
movie
M003
Duration
Title
Up Folder
M001
M002
M003
1:340, 120KB
M004
M005
Up Folder
Navigation
Popup Menu
Movie List
movie
M003
Page Change
MARK
Mark
No Marked
Page 2/3
1366x768, 125KB
Play
M002
Mark All
M003
TO USE A USB DEVICE
1:340, 120KB
Up Folder
1
2
Delete
M004
Popup Menu
Close
M005
Page Change
MARK
Mark
Select the target folder or drive.
Select the desired movie title
OK
3
OK
Play : Play the selected movie.
Divx Play is executed while screen changes.
G M a r k A l l : Mark all Movie in the folder.
G U n m a r k A l l : Deselect all marked movies.
G D e l e t e or Delete Marked(FAT32 file system only)
: Delete the selected Movie item.
G C l o s e : Close the pop-up menu.
G
Duration
Title
Up Folder
M001
Navigation
Exit
Exit
• Use the P
button to navigation in the
movie page.
• Use M A R K button to mark or unmark a movie.
When one or more movie files are marked, the
marked movies will be played in sequence.
Show the PopUp menu.
4
OK
Select the desired PopUp menu.
• Press the R E T U R N button to return to normal TV viewing.
! NOTE
G
106
In the case of files not supported, a message regarding non-supported file is displayed.
Using the Movie List function, play
Picture Size
F
Full
G
1
Audio Language
Subtitle Language
Latin 1
. Sync
0
. Position
0
Close
P i c t u r e S i z e : Selects your desired picture
format during movie play.
G Audio Language & Subtitle Language :
Changes the Language Group of the
audio/subtitle during movie play.
G S y n c : Adjusts the time synchronisation of
the subtitle from -10 secs to +10 secs by
steps of 0.5 secs during movie play.
G P o s i t i o n : Changes the position of the subtitle either up or down during movie play.
G
Option
Support Language
Latin1
English, Spanish, French, German, Italian, Swedish, Finnish,
Dutch, Portuguese, Danish, Romanian, Norwegian,
Albanian, Gaelic, Welsh, Irish, Catalan,Valencian
Latin2
Bosnian, Polish, Croatian, Czech,
Slovak, Slovenian, Serbian, Hungarian
Latin4
Estonian, Latvian, Lithuanian
Cyrillic
Bulgarian, Macedonian, Russian, Ukrainian, Kazakh
Greek
Greek
Turkish
Turkish
! NOTE
Only the files saved in ASCII CODE is supported
for the external subtitles of the movie.
G Only 500 alphabets and 500 numbers are
supported for each line of the subtitle.
G Only 10,000 of sync blocks can be supported
within the subtitle file.
G
Using the remote control
TO USE A USB DEVICE
Subtitle Language
When playing,
FF
/ GG
repeatedly, press the R E W( FF) button to speed up FF(x2) -> FFF(x4) ->
FFFF(x8) -> FFFFF(x16) ->FFFFFF(x32) .
repeatedly, press the F F( GG) button to speed up GG(x2)-> GGG(x4) -> GGGG(x8)
-> GGGGG(x16) -> GGGGGG(x32).
■
II
During playback, press the P a u s e ( I I) button.
■ Still screen is displayed.
■If no buttons are pressed on the remote control for 10 minutes after pausing, the TV
returns to the playback state.
■ Press the P a u s e ( I I ) button and then use the F F ( GG ) button for slow motion.
■
P L A Y ( G)
Pressing these buttons repeatedly increases the fast forward/reverse speed.
When using the
or
button during playback a cursor indicating the position
can be viewed on the screen.
Press the P L A Y( G) button to return to normal playback.
Press the E N E R G Y S A V I N G button repeatedly to increase the brightness of your
screen.(Refer to p. 116)
AV MODE
Press the A V M O D E button repeatedly to select the desired source.(Refer to p. 86)
107
TO USE A USB DEVICE
DIVX REGISTRATION CODE
(Only 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47/55LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70**,
42/47LH90**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**, 42/50PQ35**, 42PQ65**, 50PS65**)
Confirm the DivX registration code number of the TV. Using the registration number, movies can be rented or
purchased at www.divx.com/vod.
With a DivX registration code from other TV, playback of rented or purchased DivX file is not allowed. (Only DivX
files matched with the registration code of the purchased TV are playable.)
USB
Move
OK
USB
Photo List
Photo List
Music List
Music List
Movie List
Movie List
DivX
DivXReg.
Reg.Code
Code
DivX
DivX Reg.
Reg. Code
Code
Deactivation
Deactivation
Move
i
OK
DivX(R) Video On Demand
Your registration Code is: xxxxxxxxxx
To learn more visit www.divx.com/vod.
Close
TO USE A USB DEVICE
1 MENU
Select U S B.
2
Select D i v X R e g . C o d e.
OK
3
OK
Display D i v X R e g . C o d e.
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX,Inc. This is an
official DivX Certified device that plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX video.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in
order to play DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) content. To generate the registration
code, locate the DivX VOD section in the device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com with
this code to complete the registration process and learn more about DivX VOD.
“DivX Certified to play DivX video up to HD 1080p, including premium content”
“Pat. 7,295,673; 7,460,688;7,519,274”
! NOTE
Movie files are supported as follows
Resolution : under 1920x1080 WxH pixels
Frame rate : under 30 frames/sec(1920x1080), under 60 frames/sec(under 1280x720)
G Video Codec : MPEG 1, MPEG 2, MPEG 4, H.264/AVC, DivX 3.11, DivX 4.12, DivX 5.x, DivX 6,
Xvid 1.00, Xvid 1.01, Xvid 1.02, Xvid 1.03, Xvid 1.10-beta1, Xvid 1.10-beta2
G
108
DEACTIVATION
(Only 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47/55LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70**,
42/47LH90**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**, 42/50PQ35**, 42PQ65**, 50PS65**)
The purpose of deactivation is to allow deactivation of devices for users who have activated all the available
devices through the web_server and are blocked from activating more devices. DivX VOD allowed the consumer to
activate up to 6 devices under one account, but to replace or deactivate any of those devices, the consumer had
to contact DivX Support and request deletion. Now with this added feature, consumers will be able to deactivate
the device themselves and hence better manage their DivX VOD devices.
USB
Move
OK
USB
Photo List
Photo List
Music List
Music List
Movie List
Movie List
DivX Reg. Code
DivX Reg. Code
Deactivation
Deactivation
Move
i
OK
DivX(R) Video On Demand
Do you want to deactivate your device?
Yes
2
Select U S B.
OK
Select D e a c t i v a t i o n.
OK
Select Y e s.
3
4
OK
Close
TO USE A USB DEVICE
1 MENU
No
i DivX(R) Video On Demand
This device is deactivated.
Your deactivation code is: xxxxxxxx
To learn more visit www.divx.com/vod.
Display D e a c t i v a t i o n.
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
109
EPG (ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE)(IN DIGITAL MODE)
This system has an Electronic Programme Guide (EPG) to help your navigation through all the possible viewing options.
The EPG supplies information such as programme listings, start and end times for all available services. In addition,
detailed information about the programme is often available in the EPG (the availability and amount of these programme
details will vary, depending on the particular broadcaster).
This function can be used only when the EPG information is broadcast by broadcasting companies
The EPG displays the programme details for next 8 days.
Shows the present screen information.
Displayed with a Teletext Programme.
Displayed with a DTV Programme.
Displayed with a Subtitle Programme.
Displayed with a Radio Programme.
Displayed with a Scramble Programme.
Displayed with a MHEG Programme.
Displayed with a Dolby Programme.
DTV
MPEG Displayed with a MPEG Programme.
Displayed with a Dolby Digital PLUS
Programme.
Aspect ratio of broadcasting programme.
Aspect ratio of broadcasting programme.
576i/p, 720p, 1080i/p : Resolution of broadcasting programme
Switch on/off EPG
1GUIDE
1
or
P
Select desired programme.
2
OK
The EPG will disappear after moving to
a selected program.
Button Function in NOW/NEXT Guide Mode
You can view a program being broadcasted and one scheduled to follow.
RED Change EPG mode.
Programme Guide
1 YLE TV1
DTV
YELLO
YELLOW Enter Timer Record/Remind setting mode.
DTV
DTV
DTV
DTV
DTV
DTV
DTV
BLUE Enter Timer Record/Remind list mode.
ALL
DTV
DTV
DTV
DTV
DTV
DTV
DTV
DTV
NOW
1 YLE TV1
Your World Today
4 TV..
Legenen om Den....
Naturtimmen
Lyssna
Glamour
8 YLE24
DTV
DTV
FAV Favourite
The EPG will disappear after moving to a
selected program.
Mode
Select NOW or NEXT Programme.
GUIDE
Select the Broadcast Programme.
TV/RAD
Page Up/Down.
Keno
World Business
Fantomen
Kritiskt
ABC
Tänään otsikoissa
E
DTV
OK
NEXT
That ’70s show
2 YLE TV2
5 YLE FST
6 CNN
6 Apr. 2007 15:09
E
EPG (ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE)(IN DIGITAL MODE)
Select a programme
P
110
Switch on or off EPG.
INFO
i Information
Pr. Change
TV/RAD RADIO
Schedule
or
Switch off EPG.
Select TV or RADIO Programme.
Detail information on or off
Schedule List
Button Function in 8 Day Guide Mode
Programme Guide
1 YLE TV1
DTV
ALL
DTV
DTV
DTV
GREEN Enter Date setting mode.
15:00
Kungskonsumente
Antigues Roadshow
Mint Extra
TV2: Farmen The Drum
The Drum
You Call The Hits
Fashion Essentials
...
... ...
Tänään otsikoissa
4 TV..
DTV
DTV
DTV
5 YLE FST
6 CNN
DTV
DTV
DTV
DTV
DTV
DTV
8 YLE24
DTV
DTV
mode.
14:00
2 YLE TV2
DTV
DTV
YELLO
YELLOW Enter Timer Record/Remind setting
6 Apr. (Fri.)
1 YLE TV1
DTV
6 Apr. 2007 15:09
E
RED Change EPG mode.
...
E
FAVDTV Favourite
INFO
i Information
Pr. Change
Date
Mode
TV/RAD RADIO
Schedule
Schedule List
BLUE Enter Timer Record/Remind list mode.
Page Up/Down.
P
OK
The EPG will disappear after moving to
a selected program.
GUIDE
Switch off EPG.
or
Select Programme.
TV/RAD
Select TV or RADIO Programme.
Select the Broadcast Programme.
Button Function in Date Change Mode
Programme Guide
1 YLE TV1
ALL
E
DTV
6 Apr. 2007 15:09
6 Apr. (Fri.)
14:00
E
DTV
E
GREEN Switch off Date setting mode.
15:00
E
OK
Change to the selected date.
DTV
DTV
DTV
DTV
DTV
DTV
DTV
DTV
Select a date.
DTV
DTV
DTV
DTV
DTV
DTV
DTV
DTV
DTV
Switch off Date setting mode.
GUIDE
or
Switch off EPG.
1 YLE TV1
2 YLE TV2
4 TV..
5 YLE FST
6 CNN
8 YLE24
...
Kungskonsumente
Antigues Roadshow
Mint Extra
TV2: Farmen The Drum
The Drum
You Call The Hits
Fashion Essentials
...
... ...
Tänään otsikoissa
E
Date. Change
Date Exit
EPG (ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE)(IN DIGITAL MODE)
Detail information on or off
111
EPG (ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE)(IN DIGITAL MODE)
Button Function in Extended Description Box
DTV
Information
Text Up/Down.
DTV
6 Apr. 2007 15:09
DTV
6 Apr. 2007
YELLO
YELLOW Enter Timer Record/Remind setting mode.
The detail information on or off.
or
GUIDE
E
Switch off EPG.
INFO
i Info. Exit
Schedule
Button Function in Record/Remind Setting Mode
Sets a start or end time for recording, and sets only a start time for the reminder with the end time grayed out.
This function is available only when recording equipment that use pin8 recording signalling has been connected to the DTV-OUT(AV2) terminal, using a SCART cable.
Change to Guide or Schedule mode.
Select the date to record.
Date
6 Mar.
End Time
Programme
15:09
17 : 30
That ’70s sh
E
Prev.
OK
Select Date, Start/End time or Programme.
OK
Save Timer Record/Remind.
Button Function in Schedule List Mode
If you’ve created a schedule list, a scheduled program is displayed at the scheduled time even when you are
watching a different program at the time.
Only the Up/Down/OK/Return keys will work when a popup window is open.
Schedule List
RED Add new Manual Recording setting mode.
Page1/1
Start Date
Fri. 6 Apr. 2007 15:09
Start Time
Title
6 May
16:00
Friend1
6 May
18:00
Friend2
BLUE or
GUIDE
Friend2
16:00
Modify
Delete
GREEN Add new Timer Watching setting mode.
Delete All
Remind
DTV 19 Dave
(Fri.)06/05/2007
16:00
Change to Guide mode.
D
E
Close
Modify/Delete
Move
New Record
P
Page Change
New Remind
Switch off EPG.
OK
Select S c h e d u l e L i s t.
Select your desired Option(Modify/Delete/Delete All).
P
112
Start Time
E
EPG (ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE)(IN DIGITAL MODE)
Select Record or Remain.
Function setting.
Page Up/Down.
Exit
Programme Guide
PICTURE CONTROL
PICTURE SIZE (ASPECT RATIO) CONTROL
You can watch the screen in various picture formats; 16:9, Just Scan,
Original, Full Wide, 4:3, 14:9, Zoom and Cinema Zoom.
If a fixed image is displayed on the screen for a long time, that fixed image
may become imprinted on the screen and remain visible.
You can adjust the enlarge proportion using
button.
This function works in the following signal.
1Q. MENU
Select A s p e c t R a t i o.
2
• You can also adjust Aspect Ratio in the P I C-
T U R E menu.
• For Zoom Setting, select 1 4 : 9, Z o o m and
Select the desired picture format.
• Original
When your TV receives a wide screen signal it will automatically change to the picture format broadcast.
Original
• Just Scan
Following Selection will lead to you view the
picture of best quality without loss of original
picture in high resolution image.
Note : If there is noise in original Picture, You
can see the noise at the edge.
Just Scan
PICTURE CONTROL
• 16:9
The following selection will allow you to adjust the picture horizontally, in linear proportion, to fill the entire
screen(useful for viewing 4:3 formatted DVDs).
C i n e m a Z o o m in Ratio Menu. After completing
Zoom Setting, the display goes back to Q.Menu.
• Full Wide
When TV receives the wide screen signal,it will
lead you to adjust the picture horizontally or
vertically, in a linear proportion,to fill the entire
screen fully.
Full Wide
113
PICTURE CONTROL
• 4:3
The following selection will allow you to view a picture
with an original 4:3 aspect ratio, gray bars will appear
on both the left and right of the screen.
• Zoom
The following selection will allow you to view
the picture without any alteration, while filling
the entire screen. However, the top and bottom of the picture will be cropped.
• 14:9
You can view a picture format of 14:9 or a general TV
programme in the 14:9 mode. The 14:9 screen is
viewed in the same way as in 4:3, but is magnified to
the left and right.
• Cinema Zoom
Choose Cinema Zoom when you want to
enlarge the picture in correct proportion.
Note:When enlarging or reducing the picture,
the image may become distorted.
PICTURE CONTROL
F or G button: Adjust enlarge proportion of
Cinema Zoom. The adjustment range is 1 to 16.
E or D button: Move the screen.
! NOTE
G
G
G
G
G
114
You can only select 4 : 3, 1 6 : 9 (Wide), 1 4 : 9, Z o o m / C i n e m a Z o o m in Component mode.
You can only select 4 : 3, Original, 1 6 : 9 (Wide), 1 4 : 9, Z o o m / C i n e m a Z o o m in HDMI mode.
You can only select 4 : 3, 1 6 : 9 (Wide) in RGB-PC, HDMI-PC mode only.
In DTV/HDMI/Component (over 720p) mode, J u s t S c a n is available.
In Analogue/AV mode, Full Wide is available.
PICTURE WIZARD
This feature lets you adjust the picture quality of the original image.
Use this to calibrate the screen quality by adjusting the Black and White Level etc. General users can calibrate the
screen quality by easily following each stage.
When you adjust the image to Low, Recommended or High, you can see the changed result as an example.
In RGB-PC/HDMI-PC/DVI-PC mode, the changed Colour, Tint and H/V Sharpness values are not applied.
Picture Wizard
PICTURE
Move
Aspect Ratio
OK
With Picture Wizard, you can adjust the picture quality of the
original image.
: 16:9
Picture Wizard
Energy Saving
Picture Mode
: Off
: Standard
• Backlight
70
• Contrast
90
• Brightness
50
• Sharpness
70
Previous
E
Select P I C T U R E.
2
OK
3
OK
4
OK
OK
Select P i c t u r e W i z a r d.
• If you stop the setting before the final stage, the
changes will not be applied
• The adjustment value is saved to Expert1.
• Once the Picture Wizard sets the image quality, the
Energy Saving is changed into Off. (LCD TV/LED
LCD TV only)
Adjust B l a c k l e v e l , W h i t e l e v e l , C o l o u r , T i n t , H S h a r p n e s s , V
S h a r p n e s s , C o l o u r T e m p e r a t u r e(Only 42/47LH90**), D y n a m i c
C o n t r a s t(Only 42/47LH90**), C o l o u r G a i n(Only 42/47LH90**),
B a c k l i g h t (LCD TV/LED LCD TV only).
MARK
FAV
PICTURE CONTROL
1 MENU
Next
Select input source to apply the settings.
5
OK
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
115
PICTURE CONTROL
ENERGY SAVING
It reduces the TV’s power consumption.
The default factory setting complies with the E n e r g y S t a r requirements and is adjusted to the comfortable
level to be viewed at home.
You can increase the brightness of your screen by adjusting the E n e r g y S a v i n g l e v e l or by setting the
P i c t u r e M o d e.
When adjusting Energy Saving in MHEG mode, the Energy Saving setting is applied after MHEG is finished.
S c r e e n O f f’ while tuned to a radio station channel will reduce power consumption. (LCD TV/LED LCD
Selecting ‘S
TV only)
L C D T V/ L E D L C D T V o n l y
PICTURE
Aspect Ratio
Move
Plasma TV only
PICTURE
OK
: 16:9
Aspect Ratio
Picture Wizard
Auto
EnergySaving
Saving : :Intelligent
IntelligentSensor
Sensor
Energy
Intelligent Sensor
Off
: Standard Off
• Backlight Minimum
70
Picture Mode
: Vivid
• Contrast
100Minimum
• Brightness
50 Medium
• Sharpness
70 Maximum
• Sharpness Screen
70 Off
• Colour
70
Select P I C T U R E.
PICTURE CONTROL
2
F
Low
G
Off
• Contrast Medium
90
• BrightnessMaximum
50
E
1 MENU
OK
Picture Wizard
EnergySaving
Saving : :Off
Off
Energy
Picture Mode
Move
: 16:9
E
1 MENU
Select P I C T U R E.
2
OK
3
OK
Select
OK
E n e r g y S a v i n g.
Select A u t o(except for 19/22LU40**,
19/22/26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**,
32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**,
19/22/26LG31**,
19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**,
19/22/26/32LD3**,
32/37/42/47LH3***),, O f f ,
M i n i m u m , M e d i u m , M a x i m u m or
S c r e e n O f f.
3
OK
Select
E n e r g y S a v i n g.
Select I n t e l l i g e n t S e n s o r ,
O f f , M i n i m u m , M e d i u m or
M a x i m u m.
• Intelligent Sensor
Select L o w, M i d d l e or H i g h .
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
• When selecting Screen off, TV turned off after 3 seconds.
• If you adjust “EE n e r g y S a v i n g - A u t o (except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**,
116
32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, 19/22/26LG31**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 19/22/26/32LD3**,
32/37/42/47LH3***), M i n i m u m, M e d i u m, M a x i m u m”, B a c k l i g h t feature will not work.(LCD TV/LED LCD TV only).
• You can also adjust this feature by selecting E n e r g y S a v i n g button on the remote control.
• When selecting Auto, Backlight is automatically adjusted through intelligent sensor according to the surrounding condition when intelligent sensor is in the TV.
PRESET PICTURE SETTINGS
Picture Mode-Preset
Strengthen the contrast, brightness, colour and sharpness for vivid picture.
The most general screen display status.
The most natural screen display status.
Optimizes video for watching movies.
Optimizes video for watching sports events.
Optimizes video for playing games.
Vivid
Standard
Natural
Cinema
Sport
Game
Plasma TV only
L C D T V/ L E D L C D T V o n l y
PICTURE
Aspect Ratio
Move
: 16:9
Picture Wizard
Energy Saving
Picture
PictureMode
Mode
PICTURE
OK
Intelligent Sensor
Move
: 16:9
Picture Wizard
Vivid
Vivid
: IntelligentStandard
Sensor
Vivid
Vivid
: :Vivid
Vivid
Cinema
Energy Saving
: Off
Vivid
: :Standard
StandardStandard
Standard
Picture
PictureMode
Mode
• BacklightNatural
80
• ContrastCinema
90
• Brightness
50
Sport
• Sharpness
60
Game
E
OK
Aspect Ratio
Cinema
• Contrast
100
Sport
• Brightness 50
Game
• Sharpness 70
Expert1
• Colour
70
Expert2
E
Standard
Sport
Game
Expert1
Expert2
Expert1
( Only 50/60PS80**)
Expert2
MENU
2
OK
3
OK
Select P I C T U R E.
Select P i c t u r e M o d e.
Select I n t e l l i g e n t S e n s o r(except for
19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**,
32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***,
32/37/42LG33**, 19/22/26LG31**,
19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**,
19/22/26/32LD3**,
32/37/42/47LH3***), V i v i d,
S t a n d a r d, N a t u r a l, C i n e m a, S p o r t
or G a m e.
1 MENU
2
OK
3
OK
Select P I C T U R E.
Select P i c t u r e M o d e.
Select V i v i d, S t a n d a r d,
C i n e m a ( o r C i n e m a ), S p o r t or
G a m e.
PICTURE CONTROL
1
( Except for
50/60PS80**)
• P i c t u r e M o d e adjusts the TV for the best picture appearance. Select the preset value in the P i c t u r e M o d e
menu based on the programme category.
• When the Intelligent sensor function is on, the most suitable picture is automatically adjusted according to the surrounding
conditions. (except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**,
19/22/26LG31**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 19/22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42/47LH3***)
• You can also adjust P i c t u r e M o d e in the Q . M e n u.
• I n t e l l i g e n t S e n s o r Adjusts picture according to the surrounding conditions. (except for 19/22LU40**,
19/22/26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, 19/22/26LG31**,
19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 19/22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42/47LH3***)
•
C i n e m a (Only 50/60PS80**) :This is cinema quality mode to provide you the experience of watching a movie at home.The user will be able enjoy the best level of satisfactory screen quality in any movie without any separate adjustments.Cinema expresses the optimal screen quality when it is darkest.
C i n e m a, Aspect ratio changes to Just scan.
When selecting
•
C i n e m a(Thomlinson Holman ’s Experiment)is the audio and video certification standard of THX
established by George Lucas,who directed the movie Star Wars,and Thomlinson.
This is the product to be certified in THX display area and guarantees screen quality that exceeds the display standard specification in both hardware and software.
117
PICTURE CONTROL
MANUAL PICTURE ADJUSTMENT
Picture Mode-User option
B a c k l i g h t (LCD TV/LED LCD TV Only)
To control the brightness of the screen, adjust the brightness of LCD panel.
Adjusting the backlight when setting the brightness of the set is recommended.
Contrast
Adjusts the signal level between black and white in the picture. You may use Contrast when the bright part of the
picture is saturated.
Brightness
Adjusts the base level of the signal in the picture.
Sharpness
Adjusts the level of crispness in the edges between the light and dark areas of the picture.
The lower the level, the softer the image.
Colour
Adjusts intensity of all colours.
Tint
Adjusts the balance between red and green levels.
It is not available to use this function in “II n t e l l i g e n t S e n s o r”(except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**,
32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, 19/22/26LG31**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**,
19/22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42/47LH3***).
PICTURE
Aspect Ratio
Move
PICTURE
OK
: 16:9
Aspect Ratio
Picture Wizard
Energy Saving
PictureMode
Mode
Picture
Energy Saving
Standard
: :Standard
Picture
PictureMode
Mode
PICTURE CONTROL
• Contrast
90
• Contrast
50
• Sharpness
70
Select P i c t u r e M o d e.
Select V i v i d, S t a n d a r d, N a t u r a l,
C i n e m a(or
C i n e m a), S p o r t
or G a m e.
OK
4
Natural
• Benefits of using Backlight
(LCD TV/LED LCD TV Only)
- The electricity consumption is reduced by up to 60%.
- The black brightness is reduced. (As the black has
greater depth, you can enjoy a better quality definition.)
- You can adjust brightness with maintaining original
signal resolution.
OK
Select B a c k l i g h t(LCD TV/LED LCD TV only), C o n t r a s t,
B r i g h t n e s s, S h a r p n e s s, C o l o u r or T i n t.
OK
Make appropriate adjustments.
5
Standard
Standard
Cinema
80
Sport
90
Game
• Brightness 50
Expert1
• Sharpness 60
E
Expert2
• Backlight
Select P I C T U R E.
3
: :Standard
Standard
70
1 MENU
OK
: Off
• Backlight
• Brightness
OK
Intelligent Sensor
Vivid
Picture Wizard
: Off
E
2
Move
: 16:9
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
! NOTE
G
G
118
You cannot adjust colour, sharpness and tint in the RGB-PC/HDMI-PC mode.
When the E x p e r t 1 / 2 is selected, you can select B a c k l i g h t(LCD TV/LED LCD TV only), C o n t r a s t,
B r i g h t n e s s, H S h a r p n e s s , V S h a r p n e s s, C o l o u r or T i n t .
PICTURE IMPROVEMENT TECHNOLOGY
You can calibrate the screen for each Picture Mode or set the video value according to the special video screen.
You can set the video value differently for each input.
To reset to the factory default screen after making adjustments to each video mode, execute the “Picture Reset”
function for each Picture Mode.
Image shown may differ from your TV.
PICTURE
Move
PICTURE
OK
Colour Temperature
F
90 Medium
Low
50
60 Medium
E
• Contrast
90
• Brightness
50
Dynamic Contrast
• Contrast
Dynamic
Colour
• Brightness
• Sharpness
70
Noise
Reduction
• Sharpness
R
• Colour
60
Gamma
• Colour
R
G
G
Medium
Move
OK
AdvancedControl
Control
••Advanced
• Picture Reset
• Picture Reset
Real Cinema
0
R
G
Screen
Screen
Colour Temperature
TruMotion
E 100Hz
Medium
Low
Noise Reduction
Medium
Off
Gamma
Medium
On
Black Level
Low
Film Mode
Auto
G
Close
L C D T V/ L E D L C D T V o n l y
G
Medium
Dynamic Colour
R
E
Auto
On
E
Close
Plasma TV only
Select P I C T U R E.
2
OK
3
OK
4
Select A d v a n c e d C o n t r o l.
Select your desired Source.:
C o l o u r T e m p e r a t u r e, D y n a m i c C o n t r a s t, D y n a m i c C o l o u r, N o i s e R e d u c t i o n , G a m m a ,
B l a c k L e v e l, E y e C a r e(LCD TV/LED LCD TV only), R e a l C i n e m a(LCD TV/LED LCD TV only),
F i l m M o d e(Plasma TV only), T r u M o t i o n 1 0 0 H z or T r u M o t i o n 2 0 0 H z(LCD TV/LED LCD
TV only), C o l o u r G a m u t, E d g e E n h a n c e r, x v Y C C or O P C(LCD TV/LED LCD TV
only)). ( R e f e r t o p . 1 2 1 t o 1 2 2 )
Make appropriate adjustments.
PICTURE CONTROL
1 MENU
F
Dynamic Contrast
60 Medium
• Tint
0
Black
Level
•
Advanced
Control
•
Advanced
Control
Eye Care
• Tint
G
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
119
PICTURE CONTROL
EXPERT PICTURE CONTROL
By segmenting categories, E x p e r t 1 and E x p e r t 2 provide more categories which users can set as they see fit,
offering the optimal picture quality for users.
This may also be used to help a professional optimize the TV performance using specific videos.
Image shown may differ from your TV.
PICTURE
Move
Aspect Ratio
: 16:9
PICTURE
Energy Saving
: Off
Standard
Natural
Expert1
: :Standard
Cinema
• Backlight
80
Sport
• Contrast
90
Game
• Brightness 50
Expert1
Expert1
• Sharpness 60
E
Expert2
Dynamic Contrast
Noise Reduction
• Contrast
Gamma
R
• Brightness
R
Black Level
• Sharpness
Real
Cinema
• Colour
Vivid
Picture Wizard
PictureMode
Mode
Picture
OK
Intelligent Sensor
F
Move
90
G
G
• Tint 100Hz
TruMotion
Screen
50
Off
G
OK
R
R
Auto
Black Level
60
On
Film Mode
0
••Expert
Expert
Control
Colour
Standard
• Picture Reset
Colour Gamut
E
Edge Enhancer
R Low
Off
F
G
G
G
Medium
Auto
On
Colour Standard
SD
SD
Colour Gamut
Standard
Standard
Edge Enhancer
High
High
Close
L C D T V/ L E D L C D T V o n l y
G
Off
Gamma
Medium
60
E
PICTURE CONTROL
1 MENU
Dynamic Contrast
Noise Reduction
Off
xvYCC
Auto
E
Close
Plasma TV only
Select P I C T U R E.
2
OK
Select P i c t u r e M o d e.
3
OK
Select
OK
Select E x p e r t C o n t r o l.
OK
Select your desired Source.
E x p e r t 1 or
E x p e r t 2.
4
5
6
Make appropriate adjustments.
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
120
*This feature is not available for all models.
Colour Temperature
[Advanced Control]
(Warm/Medium/Cool)
■
Choose one of three automatic colour adjustments. Set to warm to enhance hotter colours such as red, or set to cool to make picture bluish.
■
Adjusts the contrast to keep it at the best level according to the brightness of the
screen. The picture is improved by making bright parts brighter and dark parts darker.
■
Adjusts screen colours so that they look livelier, richer and clearer. This feature
enhances hue, saturation and luminance so that red, blue, green and white look more
vivid.
Noise Reduction
(Off/Low/Medium/High)
■
Reduces screen noise without compromising video quality.
Gamma
(Low/Medium/High)
■
You can adjust brightness of dark area and middle gray level area of the picture.
• L o w : Make dark and middle gray level area of the picture brighter.
• M e d i u m: Express original picture levels.
• H i g h: Make dark and middle gray level area of the picture darker.
Dynamic Contrast
(Off/Low/Medium(LCD
TV/LED LCD TV
only)/High)
Dynamic Colour
(Off/Low/High )
Black Level
(Low/High)
• L o w : The picture of the screen gets darker.
• H i g h : The picture of the screen gets brighter.
• A u t o : Realizing the black level of the screen and set it to High or Low automatically.
■
■
Real Cinema/Film Mode
(On/Off)
TruMotion 100Hz or
TruMotion 200Hz
(Off/Low/High )
*This feature is not available for all models.
■ Adjust the brightness of the screen to prevent the screen from being too bright.
Dims extremely bright pictures.
■ This feature is disable in “P
P i c t u r e M o d e-VV i v i d, C i n e m a, I n t e l l i g e n t S e n s o r (except for
19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**,
19/22/26LG31**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 19/22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42/47LH3***)”.
■
■
■
You can watch a cinema-like video by eliminating judder effect.
Use this function when you watch movies.
This function can work when TruMotion is off.
*This feature is not available for all models.
• H i g h : Provides smoother picture movement.
• L o w : Provides smooth picture movement. Use this setting for standard use.
• O f f : Use this setting when "High" and "Low" setting result in noise.
■ TruMotion 100Hz can reduce perception of blur on fast moving scenes by displaying one hundred images per second.
■ TruMotion 200Hz displays 200 scenes per second by combining advanced
100Hz technology with scanning backlight. This technology is verified from
Intertek & TüV Rheinland.
■ It is used for the best picture quality without any motion blur or judder when
you enter a quick image or Film Source.
■ This feature is disable in RGB-PC,HDMI-PC mode.
■ If you enable "TruMotion 100Hz or TruMotion 200Hz", noise may appear on the screen.
If this occurs, set "TruMotion 100Hz or TruMotion 200Hz" to "Off".
PICTURE CONTROL
Eye Care
(On/Off)
Set black level of the screen to proper level.
This function enables to select 'Low' or 'High' in the following mode: AV(NTSC-M), HDMI
or Component. Otherwise, 'Black level' is set to 'Auto'.
121
PICTURE CONTROL
• S t a n d a r d : Mode to reproduce original colour according to the standard of
Colour Gamut
(Wide/Standard)
input signal independent of the display characteristics.
• W i d e : Mode to use and set the rich colour area of the display.
■ Maximize the utilization for colour area that can be expressed.
Edge Enhancer(LCD TV/LED
LCD TV :Off/Low/High
Plasma TV:On/Off)
Shows clearer and distinctive yet natural corners of the video.
P i c t u r e M o d e-C
C i n e m a, E x p e r t.”(LCD TV/LED LCD
This function is enabled in “P
TV only)
*This feature is not available for all models.
■ This is the function to express richer colour.
■ This function is enabled in "Picture mode - Cinema, Expert" when xvYCC signal is
inputted through HDMI
■
■
xvYCC
(Auto/off/on)
*This feature is not available for all models.
■ As the technology to reduce the power consumption while keeping the same
brightness, this has the effect of reducing power consumption, improvement in
contrast.
OPC
(On/Off)
Colour Standard
(SD/HD)
PICTURE CONTROL
Expert Pattern
(Off/Expert1/Expert2)
A
Colour Filter
(Off/Red/Green/Blue)
■
A
■
Colour Temperature
[Expert Control](LCD
TV/LED LCD TV),
White Balance(Plasma TV)
(Medium/Warm/Cool)
Colour Management
System
122
■
Converts the colour of a different video to HD colour. This function is set for SD
video (BT-601) and HD video (BT-709) colour format.
This is the pattern necessary for expert adjustment.
This function is enabled in "Picture Mode - Expert" when you watch DTV.
This is the function to filter the specific colours of the video.
You can use the RGB filter to set colour saturation and hue accurately.
This is the function to adjust the overall colour of the screen to the feeling you want.
a. • Method : 2 Points
• Pattern: Inner, Outer
• Red/Green/Blue Contrast, Red/Green/Blue Brightness:
The adjustment range is -50 to +50.
b. • Method : 10 point IRE(LCD TV/LED LCD TV), 20 Point IRE(Plasma TV)
• Pattern: Inner / Outer
• IRE (Institute of Radio Engineers) is the unit to display the size of the video signal and can be set among 10, 20, 30 to 100(LCD TV/LED LCD TV), 5, 10, 15 to
100(Plasma TV). You can adjust Red, Green or Blue according to each setting.
• Luminance: This function displays calculated luminance value for 2.2 gamma. You can input
luminance value you want at 100 IRE, than the target luminance value for 2.2 gamma is displayed at every 10 steps from 10 IRE to 90 IRE.(LCD TV/LED LCD TV only)
• Red/Green/Blue: The adjustment range is -50 to +50.
As the tool used by the experts to make adjustments by using the test patterns, this
does not affect other colours but can be used to selectively adjust the 6 colour
areas (Red/Green/Blue/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow).
Colour difference may not be distinctive even when you make the adjustments for
the general video.
■ Adjusts Red/Green/Blue/Yellow/Cyan/Magenta.
• Red/Green/Blue/Yellow/Cyan/Magenta Colour : The adjustment range
is -30 to +30.
• Red/Green/Blue/Yellow/Cyan/Magenta Tint : The adjustment range is
-30 to +30.
■ This feature is disable in RGB-PC and HDMI (PC) mode.
■
PICTURE RESET
Settings of the selected picture modes return to the default factory settings.
PICTURE
Move
PICTURE
OK
E
E
• Contrast
90
• Brightness
50
• Brightness
50
• Sharpness
70
• Colour
60
• Sharpness
60
? All picture setting will be resetted.
• Colour
60
continue?
G
• Tint
0 R
0
R
G
• Advanced Control
• Advanced Control
Yes
PictureReset
Reset
••Picture
PictureReset
Reset
••Picture
Screen
No
Screen
3
Select P I C T U R E.
Select Y e s or N o.
OK
2
OK
OK
90
• Tint
1 MENU
Move
• Contrast
4
Select P i c t u r e R e s e t.
OK
Initialize the adjusted value.
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
After analyzing the signal of the input video by areas of the screen, it adjusts the backlight to improve the contrast ratio.
PICTURE
Move
PICTURE
OK
E
• Brightness
50
• Sharpness
70
• Sharpness
70
• Colour
60
• Colour
60
0
R
G
• Tint
• Advanced Control
0
R
G
• Advanced Control
• Picture Reset
• Picture Reset
Screen
LED Local
Local Dimming
Dimming
LED
OK
E
50
• Tint
1 MENU
Move
• Brightness
PICTURE CONTROL
LED LOCAL DIMMING (Only 42/47LH90**)
Screen
: :Off
Off
Select P I C T U R E.
LED
LED Local
Local Dimming
Dimming
Off
Off
: :Off
On
On
3
OK
Select O n or O f f.
2
OK
Select L E D L o c a l D i m m i n g.
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
123
PICTURE CONTROL
POWER INDICATOR
(except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**, 19/22/26LH20**, 19/22/26LD3**,
32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, 19/22/26LG31**,
32/42/47LF51**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**, 42/50PQ35**, 42PQ65**, 50PS65**)
It helps you adjust the brightness of moving LED and sound when power is turned on.
S t a r t u p S o u n d(Only 32/37/42/47LH70**)
Set Startup Sound to O f f , L o w , M e d i u m or H i g h when the power is turned on.
Standby Light
Determines whether to set the indicator light on the front of the TV to O f f, L o w or H i g h in standby
mode.(Only 32/37/42/47LH70**)
Determines whether to set the indicator light on the front of the TV to O n or O f f in standby mode.(except for
32/37/42/47LH70**)
Power Light
Determines whether to set the indicator light on the front of the TV to O n or O f f when the power turns on.
OPTION
Move
OK
OPTION
Move
OK
E
E
SIMPLINK
: On
SIMPLINK
: On
Key Lock
: Off
Key Lock
: Off
Simple Manual
Simple Manual
Set ID
Power Indicator
:1
Demo Mode
Mode Setting
Power Indicator
:1
Startup Sound
: On
Demo Mode
: On
Standby
Light
On
: Store Demo
Mode Setting
: StoreLight
Demo
Power
On
Factory Reset
Set ID
F
Medium
G
Factory Reset
Close
PICTURE CONTROL
1 MENU
Select O P T I O N.
2
OK
Select P o w e r I n d i c a t o r.
3
OK
4
Select S t a r t u p S o u n d(Only
32/37/42/47LH70**), S t a n d b y L i g h t or P o w e r
L i g h t.
Select your desired Source.
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
124
IMAGE STICKING MINIMIZATION (ISM) METHOD (PLASMA TV ONLY)
A frozen or still picture displayed on the screen for prolonged periods will result in a ghost image remaining
even when you change the image. Avoid allowing a fixed image to remain on the screen for prolonged periods.
White Wash
White wash removes permanent images from the screen.
Note: An excessive permanent image may be impossible to clear entirely with White Wash.
Orbiter
Orbiter may help prevent ghost images. However, it is best not to allow any fixed image to remain on the
screen. To avoid a permanent image on the screen, the screen will move every 2 minutes.
Colour Wash
The colour block with the screen moved a little and the white pattern are alternately displayed. It is difficult to
sense the afterimage occurred while the temporary afterimage is removed and the colour pattern is operating.
OPTION
Move
OK
OPTION
OK
E
E
SIMPLINK
: On
SIMPLINK
: On
Key Lock
: Off
Key Lock
: Off
Simple Manual
Simple Manual
:1
Set ID
ISM
ISM Method
Method
: Normal
ISM Method
Normal
::Normal
Demo Mode
: On
Demo Mode
: On
Mode Setting
: Store Demo
Mode Setting
Select O P T I O N.
Factory Reset
:1
Normal
Orbiter
: Store Demo
Colour Wash
White Wash
• If you do not need this function, set N o r m a l .
PICTURE CONTROL
Set ID
Factory Reset
1 MENU
Move
2
OK
Select I S M M e t h o d.
3
Select N o r m a l , O r b i t e r , C o l o u r W a s h or W h i t e W a s h .
OK
4
OK
Save.
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
125
PICTURE CONTROL
DEMO MODE
Display the slide show to explain the various logo of this TV.
It is not possible to use D e m o M o d e in H o m e U s e mode.
In S t o r e D e m o, D e m o M o d e is automatically set to O n.
Once D e m o M o d e is set to O f f in S t o r e D e m o, D e m o M o d e does not run and only the screen is reset.
The screen is reset automatically after 5 minutes in D e m o M o d e.
OPTION
Move
OK
OPTION
Move
E
: On
SIMPLINK
: On
Key Lock
: Off
Key Lock
: Off
Simple Manual
Set ID
OK
E
SIMPLINK
Simple Manual
:1
Set ID
Demo
DemoMode
Mode
: On
On
Power Indicator
Demo
DemoMode
Mode
: On
On
Off
Off
Mode Setting
: Store Demo
Mode Setting
: Store Demo
On
On
On(LED
On(LED On)
On)
Power Indicator
Factory Reset
:1
Factory Reset
(Except for 50/60PS70**,
50/60PS80**)
PICTURE CONTROL
1 MENU
On(LED Off)
(Only 50/60PS70**,
50/60PS80**)
Select OPTION.
2
OK
Select Demo Mode.
OK
Select O n to show the various logo of TV.
OK
Return to TV viewing.
If you want to stop the demo, press any button. (except for
+ , - button)
MUTE,
3
4
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
126
MODE SETTING
H o m e U s e ” mode for the best picture in your home environment.
We recommend setting the TV to “H
S t o r e D e m o ” mode is an optimal setting for displaying at stores..
“S
OPTION
Move
OK
OPTION
Move
OK
E
SIMPLINK
: On
SIMPLINK
Key Lock
: Off
Key Lock
:1
Demo Mode
Set ID
Power Indicator
Power Indicator
ModeSetting
Setting
Mode
: On
Demo Mode
StoreDemo
Demo
::Store
Mode
ModeSetting
Setting
Factory Reset
Selecting
the environment.
:1
Choose the setting mode you want.
: On
StoreDemo
Demo
:: Store
Store
Demo
Factory Reset
E
Home Use
Select [Home Use] to use this TV at home.
To use this TV at store, select [Store
Demo].
PICTURE CONTROL
1 MENU
: Off
Simple Manual
Simple Manual
Set ID
: On
Select OPTION.
2
OK
Select Mode Setting.
3
Select Store Demo or Home Use.
OK
4
OK
Save.
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
127
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
AUTO VOLUME LEVELER
AVL automatically remains on the same level of volume if you change programmes.
Because each broadcasting station has its own signal conditions, volume adjustment may be needed every time
the channel is changed. This feature allows users to enjoy stable volume levels by making automatic adjustments
for each program.
If sound quality or volume is not at the level you want, it is recommended to use a separate home theater system
or amp to cope with different user environments.
AUDIO
Auto Volume
Clear Voice II
Move
Auto Volume
Clear Voice II
: Off
• Level
Balance
Sound Mode
3
-
+
0
L
R
2
OK
Move
OK
Off
Off
: :Off
Off
: Off
On
• Level
3
-
+
0
L
R
Balance
Sound Mode
: Standard
: Standard
• SRS TruSurround XT : Off
• SRS TruSurround XT : Off
• Treble
50
• Treble
50
• Bass
50
• Bass
50
E
1 MENU
AUDIO
OK
::Off
Off
E
Select A U D I O.
Select A u t o V o l u m e.
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
3
OK
Select O n or O f f.
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
128
CLEAR VOICE II
By differentiating the human sound range from others, it helps users listen to human voices better.
AUDIO
Auto Volume
ClearVoice
VoiceIIII
Clear
Move
: Off
Off
: :Off
• Level
Balance
Sound Mode
AUDIO
OK
3
-
+
0
L
R
Clear Voice II
: Off
Off
Off
• Level
On
3
-
+
0
L
R
Sound Mode
: Standard
: Standard
• SRS TruSurround XT : Off
• SRS TruSurround XT : Off
• Treble
50
• Treble
50
• Bass
50
• Bass
50
Select A U D I O.
OK
: Off
Balance
E
E
1 MENU
Move
Auto Volume
O n” for C l e a r V o i c e I I, S R S
• If you select “O
T r u S u r r o u n d X T feature will not work.
• Select levels from ‘-6’ to ’+6’.
OK
Select C l e a r V o i c e I I.
OK
Select O n or O f f.
3
Adjustment for Clear Voice Level With selecting On
4
OK
Select L e v e l.
OK
Make desired adjustment.
5
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
2
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
129
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
PRESET SOUND SETTINGS-SOUND MODE
You can select your preferred sound setting; Standard, Music, Cinema, Sport or Game and you can also adjust
the Treble, Bass.
Sound Mode lets you enjoy the best sound without any Special adjustment as the TV sets the appropriate sound
options based on the programme content.
Standard, Music, Cinema, Sport and Game are preset for optimum sound quality at the factory.
Standard
Music
Cinema
Sport
Game
Offers standard-quality sound.
Optimizes sound for listening to music.
Optimizes sound for watching movies.
Optimizes sound for watching sports events.
Optimizes sound for playing games.
AUDIO
Move
Auto Volume
Clear Voice II
Auto Volume
: Off
Clear Voice II
• Level
Balance
Sound Mode
Mode
Sound
AUDIO
OK
: Off
3
-
+
0
L
R
: Standard
Balance
• SRS TruSurround XT : Off
50
• Bass
50
E
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
1 MENU
Select A U D I O.
OK
: Off
• Level
Sound Mode
• Treble
Move
: Off
:: Standard
Standard
3
-
0
L
+
R
Standard
Standard
Music
• SRS TruSurround XT - : Off
Cinema
• Treble
50 Sport
• Bass
50
Game
E
+
+
+
• You can also adjust S o u n d M o d e in the Q .
M e n u.
2
OK
Select S o u n d M o d e.
3
OK
Select S t a n d a r d , M u s i c , C i n e m a , S p o r t or G a m e.
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
130
SOUND SETTING ADJUSTMENT -USER MODE
AUDIO
Move
Auto Volume
Clear Voice II
Auto Volume
Clear Voice II
: Off
• Level
Balance
Sound
Sound Mode
Mode
AUDIO
OK
: Off
3
-
+
0
L
R
: :Standard
Standard (User)
Balance
Sound Mode
3
-
0
L
+
R
Standard
Standard (User)
::Standard
Standard (User)
• Treble
50
Music
• SRS TruSurround XT :Cinema
Off
• Treble
50 Sport
• Bass
50
• Bass
50
Game
E
E
2
OK
: Off
• Level
• SRS TruSurround XT : Off
1 MENU
Move
: Off
Select A U D I O.
OK
Select S o u n d M o d e.
OK
Select S t a n d a r d , M u s i c , C i n e m a , S p o r t or G a m e.
OK
Select T r e b l e or B a s s.
OK
Set the desired sound level.
3
4
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
SRS TRUSURROUND XT
Select this option to sound realistic.
1 MENU
2
Select A U D I O.
OK
Select S R S T r u S u r r o u n d X T.
OK
Select O n or O f f.
S R S T r u S u r r o u n d X T : TruSurround XT is a
patented SRS technology that solves the problem of playing 5.1 multicannel content over two
speakers.
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
5
3
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
G
G
is a trademark of SRS Labs, Inc.
TruSurround XT technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc.
131
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
BALANCE
You can adjust the sound balance of the speakers to preferred levels.
AUDIO
Move
Auto Volume
Clear Voice II
: Off
Auto Volume
: Off
Clear Voice II
• Level
Balance
Balance
Sound Mode
AUDIO
OK
3
-
+
0
LL
RR
Move
: Off
• Level
Sound Mode
L-
R+
0
F
R
R
: Standard
• SRS TruSurround XT : Off
• SRS TruSurround XT : Off
• Treble
50
• Treble
50
• Bass
50
• Bass
50
E
1 MENU
3
Balance
00L L
Balance
: Standard
OK
: Off
L
R
G
Close
E
3
Select A U D I O.
OK
2
Make desired adjustment.
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
Select B a l a n c e.
OK
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
TV SPEAKERS ON/ OFF SETUP
You can adjust the TV internal speaker status.
In A V 1, A V 2, A V 3, C O M P O N E N T, R G B and H D M I 1 with HDMI to DVI cable, the TV speaker can be operational even when there is no video signal.
If you wish to use an external Hi-Fi system, turn off the TV’s internal speakers.
AUDIO
Move
AUDIO
OK
Move
E
E
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
• SRS TruSurround XT : Off
• SRS TruSurround XT : Off
• Treble
50
• Treble
50
• Bass
50
• Bass
50
• Reset
• Reset
Digital Audio Out : PCM
Digital Audio Out : PCM
Off
Off
TV Speaker
Speaker
TV
TV
TVSpeaker
Speaker
On
Off
: On
Audio Description :On
•Volume
1 MENU
2
OK
:: On
Off
Audio Description :On
0
-
Select A U D I O.
+
•Volume
0
-
+
3
OK
Select O n or O f f.
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
OK
Select T V S p e a k e r.
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
! NOTE
When the TV speaker is turned off while the Simplink home theater is operating, the sound output automatically switches to the Home theater speaker, but when the TV speaker is turned on, the sound output
the TV speaker.
Some
menus in A U D I O are disabled when TV Speaker is set to Off.
G
G
132
DTV AUDIO SETTING (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY)
(This menu is enabled only in Sweden. )
When different audio types exist in an input signal, this function allows you to select the audio type you want.
AUDIO
Move
OK
AUDIO
Move
E
E
• SRS TruSurround XT : Off
• SRS TruSurround XT : Off
• Treble
50
• Treble
50
• Bass
50
• Bass
50
• Reset
2
OK
• Reset
Digital Audio Out : PCM
Digital Audio Out : PCM
Auto
Auto
TV Speaker
: On
DTVAudio
AudioSetting
Setting: :Auto
Auto
DTV
TV Speaker
MUTE
DTVAudio
AudioSetting
Setting: :Auto
Auto
DTV
Dolby Digital
Audio Description :On
Audio Description :On
MPEG
E
1 MENU
OK
: On
E
Select A U D I O.
Select D T V A u d i o S e t t i n g.
OK
Select Auto, Dolby Digital
or MPEG.
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
• Auto: Automatically outputs in the order Dolby Digital > MPEG.
• Dolby Digital, MPEG: Allows users to select the audio type they want. If MPEG is
selected, MPEG is always outputted.
If MPEG is not supported, Dolby Digital are selected in that order.
• Refer to p. 140 (Audio Language Selection)
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
3
133
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
SELECTING DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
This function allows you to select your preferred Digital Audio Output.
The TV can only output DOLBY Digital if a channel is broadcast with Dolby Digital audio.
When Dolby digital is available, selecting Auto in the Digital Audio Out menu will set SPDIF(Sony Philips Digital
InterFace) output to Dolby Digital.
If Auto is selected in the digital audio out menu when dolby digital is not available, SPDIF output will be
PCM(Pulse-code modulation).
Even if both Dolby Digital and Audio language have been set in a channel which broadcast Dolby Digital Audio,
only Dolby Digital will be played.
AUDIO
Move
AUDIO
OK
Move
E
• SRS TruSurround XT : Off
• Treble
50
• Treble
50
• Bass
50
• Bass
50
• Reset
• Reset
Digital
Digital Audio
Audio Out
Out : :PCM
PCM
TV Speaker
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
1 MENU
2
OK
3
OK
Auto
PCM
PCM
Digital
DigitalAudio
AudioOut
Out :: PCM
PCM
: On
TV Speaker
Audio Description :On
•Volume
OK
E
• SRS TruSurround XT : Off
: On
Audio Description :On
0
-
+
•Volume
-
+
Manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby “and
the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Select A U D I O.
Select D i g i t a l A u d i o O u t.
0
• There is a possibility that when HDMI mode,
some DVD players do not make SPDIF sound.
At that time, set the output of the digital audio
of the DVD player to PCM. (In HDMI, Dolby
Digital Plus is not supported).
Select A u t o or P C M.
Item
Auto(Speaker On)
Audio Input
MPEG
DD
DD+
Auto(Speaker Off)
MPEG
DD
DD+
PCM
PCM
Digital Audio output
PCM
DD
DD
PCM
PCM
DD
DD
DD
PCM
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
134
AUDIO RESET
Settings of the selected Sound Mode return to the default factory settings.
AUDIO
Move
AUDIO
OK
Move
E
E
• SRS TruSurround XT : Off
• SRS TruSurround XT : Off
• Treble
50
• Treble
50
• Bass
50
• Bass
50
•• Reset
Reset
i
Digital Audio Out : PCM
TV Speaker
TV Speaker
: On
Audio Description :On
1 MENU
2
OK
Resetsound mode configuration...
• •Reset
Resetting
Digital Audio Out : PCM
•Volume
OK
: On
Audio Description :On
0
-
+
•Volume
0
-
+
Select A U D I O.
Select R e s e t.
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
3
OK
Initialize the adjusted value.
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
135
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
AUDIO DESCRIPTION (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY)
This function is for the blind, and provides explanatory audio describing the current situation in a TV programme
in addition to the basic audio.
When Audio Description On is selected, basic audio and Audio Description are provided only for those programmes
that have Audio Description included.
AUDIO
Move
AUDIO
OK
Move
E
E
• SRS TruSurround XT : Off
• SRS TruSurround XT : Off
• Treble
50
• Treble
50
• Bass
50
• Bass
50
• Reset
1 MENU
• Reset
Digital Audio Out : PCM
Digital Audio Out : PCM
TV Speaker
: On
: On
Audio Description :On
Audio Description
Description :On
Audio
: On
•Volume
OK
TV Speaker
0
-
+
: On
•Volume
Off
On
On
0
-
+
Select A U D I O.
2
OK
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
3
OK
Select A u d i o D e s c r i p t i o n.
Select O n or O f f.
Adjustment for Audio Description Volume With selecting On
4
OK
Select V o l u m e.
OK
Make desired adjustment.
5
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
136
I/II
Stereo/Dual Reception (In Analogue Mode Only)
When a programme is selected, the sound information for the station appears with the programme number
and station name.
1Q. MENU
Select A u d i o.
2
Select the sound output.
OK
Broadcast
On Screen Display
Mono
MONO
Stereo
STEREO
Dual
DUAL I, DUAL II, DUAL I+II
Mono sound selection
If the stereo signal is weak in stereo reception, you can switch to mono. In mono reception, the clarity of
sound is improved.
A
Language selection for dual language broadcast
If a programme can be received in two languages (dual language), you can switch to DUAL I, DUAL II or DUAL
I+II.
DUAL I
DUAL II
DUAL I+II
Sends the primary broadcast language to the loudspeakers.
Sends the secondary broadcast language to the loudspeakers.
Sends a separate language to each loudspeaker.
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
A
137
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
NICAM Reception (In Analogue Mode Only)
If the TV is equipped with a receiver for NICAM reception, high quality NICAM (Near Instantaneous
Companding Audio Multiplex) digital sound can be received.
Sound output can be selected according to the type of broadcast received.
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
138
1
When NICAM mono is received, you can select N I C A M M O N O or F M M O N O.
2
When NICAM stereo is received, you can select N I C A M S T E R E O or F M M O N O.
If the stereo signal is weak, switch to F M M O N O.
3
When NICAM dual is received, you can select N I C A M D U A L I, N I C A M D U A L I I or
N I C A M D U A L I + I I or F M M O N O.
Speaker Sound Output Selection
In AV, Component, RGB and HDMI mode, you can select output sound for the left and right loudspeakers.
Select the sound output.
L + R : Audio signal from audio L input is sent to the left loudspeaker and audio signal from audio
R input is sent to the right loudspeaker.
L + L : Audio signal from audio L input is sent to left and right loudspeakers.
R + R : Audio signal from audio R input is sent to left and right loudspeakers.
ON-SCREEN MENU LANGUAGE /
COUNTRY SELECTION
The installation guide menu appears on the TV screen when it is switched on for the first time.
1
OK
Select your desired language.
OK
Select your country.
2
* If you want to change Language/ Country selection
1
MENU
Select O P T I O N.
2
OK
Select M e n u L a n g u a g e or C o u n t r y.
OK
Select your desired language or country.
3
4
Save.
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
! NOTE
If you do not finish the set-up I n s t a l l a t i o n G u i d e by pressing R E T U R N or if you time out on the
OSD (On Screen Display) the installation menu will continuously appear until the set up is completed
whenever the TV is switched on.
G If you select the wrong local country, teletext may not appear correctly on the screen and some problems
may occur during teletext operation.
G The CI (Common Interface) function may not be applied based on country broadcasting circumstances.
G DTV mode control buttons may not function based on country broadcasting circumstances.
G In country that Digital broadcasting regulation isn’t fixed, some DTV function may not work depending
on digital broadcasting circumstances.
G The Country Setting "UK" should only be activated in UK.
G If the country setting is set to "--", European terrestrial/cable digital standard broadcasting programmes
are available, but some DTV functions may not work properly.
G
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
OK
139
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
LANGUAGE SELECTION (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY)
The Audio function allows selection of a preferred language.
If audio data in a selected language is not broadcast, the default language audio will be played.
Use the Subtitle function when two or more subtitle languages are broadcast. If subtitle data in a selected language is not broadcast, the default language subtitle will be displayed.
When the languages you selected as the primary for Audio Language and Subtitle Language are not supported,
you can select language in secondary category.
1 MENU
1 MENU
Select O P T I O N.
2
2
Select A u d i o L a n g u a g e or
S u b t i t l e L a n g u a g e.
OK
Select O P T I O N.
OK
3
Select Hard of Hearing(
3
Select your desired language.
OK
OK
Select O n or O f f.
4
OK
Save.
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL
< Audio Language Selection >
G When two or more audio languages are broadcast, you can
select the audio language.
1Q. MENU
2
Audio Language OSD Information
Display
N.A
Select A u d i o
Select an audio language.
3
< Subtitle Language Selection >
G When two or more subtitle languages are broadcast, you
can select the subtitle language with the SUBTITLE button
on the remote control.
button to select a subtitle language.
G Press the
Status
Not Available
MPEG Audio
Dolby Digital Audio
Audio for “Visual Impaired”
Audio for “Hearing Impaired”
Dolby Digital Plus Audio
MUTE
Select L+R, L+L or R+R.
Subtitle Language OSD Information
Display
N.A
Status
Not Available
Teletext Subtitle
Subtitle for “Hard of Hearing”
- The audio/subtitles can be displayed in a simpler form with 1 to 3 characters broadcast by the service provider.
- When you select supplementary Audio (Audio for “Visual/Hearing Impaired”) the TV may output a part of the Main audio.
140
).
TIME SETTING
CLOCK SETUP
The clock is set automatically when receiving a digital signal. (You can set the clock manually only if the TV has no
DTV signal.)
You must set the time correctly before using on/off timer function.
When you select a Time Zone city, the TV time is set by the time offset information based on Time Zone and
GMT (Greenwich Mean Time) which is received with the broadcast signal and the time is set automatically by a
digital signal.
Once Clock is set in DTV mode, you cannot change time, but if the city name in Time Zone is changed into offset, you can change time by 1 hour.
TIME
Move
TIME
OK
Move
OK
Date
Clock
Clock
Clock
Off Time
: Off
Off Time
: Off
On Time
: Off
On Time
: Off
Sleep Timer
: Off
Sleep Timer
: Off
01
Month
Mar
Year
2008
Hour
16
Minute
09
Time Zone
London
GMT
Close
1 MENU
OK
Select C l o c k.
3
OK
4
Select either the year, month, date, time or Time Zone
option.
TIME SETTING
2
Select T I M E.
Set the year, month, date, time or Time Zone option.
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
141
TIME SETTING
AUTO ON/OFF TIME SETTING
The Off time function automatically switches the TV to standby at a preset time.
Two hours after the TV is switched on by the on time function it will automatically switch back to standby mode
unless a button has been pressed.
The Off time function overrides the On time function if both are set to the same time.
The TV must be in standby mode for the On time to work.
TIME
Move
TIME
OK
Clock
Move
Clock
Off Time
: Off
On Time
: Off
Off Time
On Time
Time
On
Sleep Timer
: Off
Sleep Timer
OK
1 Mar. 2007 16:09
: Off
Repeat
F
Off
Off
:: Off
Hour
00
: Off
Minute
00
Input
G
Antenna
Programme
TV1
Volume
30
Close
1 MENU
Select T I M E.
• To cancel O n / O f f T i m e function, select O f f.
• For On Time function only
1
2
OK
Select O f f T i m e or O n T i m e.
TIME SETTING
2
3
OK
4
Select I n p u t.
Select R e p e a t.
Select O f f, O n c e, D a i l y, M o n ~ F r i,
M o n ~ S a t, S a t ~ S u n or S u n.
5
Set the hour.
3
Select A n t e n n a or C a b l e, A V 1~ 3 ,
C o m p o n e n t, R G B or H D M I 1 ,
H D M I 2(Except for 19/22LH20**, 19/22LD3**,
19/22LG31**),, H D M I 3(Except for
19/22LU40**, 19/22LU50**,
19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**,
19/22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42LF25**,
32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**,
26LG31**),, H D M I 4(Only
32/37/42/47LH49**,
32/37/42/47/55LH50**,
32/37/42/47LH70**, 42/47LH90**,
50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**).
Set the programme.
6
Set the minutes.
4
Adjust volume level at
switch-on.
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
142
SLEEP TIMER SETTING
You do not have to remember to switch the TV off before you go to sleep.
The sleep timer automatically switches the TV to standby after the preset time has elapsed.
1Q. MENU
2
Select S l e e p T i m e r.
Select O f f, 1 0, 2 0, 3 0, 6 0, 9 0, 1 2 0, 1 8 0 or 2 4 0 m i n..
• When you switch the TV off, the preset sleep timer is cancelled.
• You can also adjust S l e e p T i m e r in the T I M E menu.
TIME SETTING
143
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS
SET PASSWORD & LOCK SYSTEM
Enter the password, press ‘0’, ‘0’, ‘0’, ‘0’ on the remote control handset.
If a channel is locked, enter the password to unlock it temporarily.
LOCK
Move
Lock
LockSystem
System
OK
:: Off
Off
Move
Lock System
Off
::Off
Off
Off
Set Password
Set Password
On
Block Programme
Block Programme
Parental Guidance
: Blocking Off
Input Block
1 MENU
LOCK
Select L O C K.
Parental Guidance
OK
: Blocking Off
Input Block
• If you forget your password, press ‘7’, ‘7’, ‘7’, ‘7’
on the remote control handset.
2
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS
OK
Select L o c k S y s t e m.
OK
Select O n.
3
4
OK
5
OK
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
Set the password.
Input a 4-digit password.
Be sure to remember this number!
Re-enter new password for confirm.
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
144
BLOCK PROGRAMME
Blocks any programme that you do not want to watch or that you do not want your children to watch.
O n”.
It is available to use this function in L o c k S y s t e m ”O
Enter a password to watch a blocked programme.
1
LOCK
Lock System
Move
YLE TV1
OK
: Off
RADIO
2 YLE TV2
4 TV4 Stockholm
5 YLE FST
6 CNN
Set Password
Block Programme
Parental Guidance
DTV
1 YLE TV1
TV
8 YLE24
9 YLE Teema
24 TV4 Fakta
14 TV4 Film
50 TV400
: Blocking Off
Input Block
Pr. Change
Navigation
P
Page Change
Previous
Block/Unblock
1 MENU
Select L O C K.
2
OK
Select B l o c k P r o g r a m m e.
3
OK
Enter the B l o c k P r o g r a m m e.
GREEN Select a programme to be locked.
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS
4
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
145
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS
PARENTAL CONTROL (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY)
This function operates according to information from the broadcasting station. Therefore if the signal has incorrect information, this function does not operate.
A password is required to gain access to this menu.
This set is programmed to remember which option it was last set to even if you switch the set off.
Prevents children from watching certain adult’s TV programmes, according to the ratings limit set.
Enter a password to watch a blocked programme.
Lock System
Move
OK
: Off
Lock System
Set Password
Set Password
Block Programme
Block Programme
Parental Guidance
Guidance
Parental
LOCK
Blocking Off
Off
:: Blocking
Input Block
Parental Guidance
Input Block
Blocking
: Permits all
Move OffOK
programmes
: Off
10 and above
11 and above
12 and above
Blocking Off
Off
:: Blocking
13 and above
14 and above
15 and above
16 and above
17 and above
18 and above
E
LOCK
Blocking Off
1 MENU
Select L O C K.
2
OK
Select P a r e n t a l G u i d a n c e.
OK
Make appropriate adjustments.
3
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS
4
OK
Save.
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
146
EXTERNAL INPUT BLOCKING
Enables you to block an input.
O n”.
It is available to use this function in L o c k S y s t e m ”O
AV1
LOCK
Lock System
Move
OK
: Off
Block Programme
Block Programme
: Blocking Off
Input
Input Block
Block
1 MENU
Lock System
Set Password
Set Password
Parental Guidance
LOCK
F
AV2
Off
G
Off
Move
AV3
: Off
Component
OK
RGB
Off
Off
Off
Parental Guidance HDMI1
: Blocking Off
Off
Input Block
Off
(Except for 19/22LH20**,
19/22LD3**, 19/22LG31**)
HDMI3
(Except for 19/22LU40**,
Off
19/22LU50**,
HDMI4
Off
19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**,
19/22/26/32LD3**,
32/37/42LF25**,
Close
32/37/42LG2***,
32/37/42LG33**, 26LG31**)
(Only 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47/55LH50**,
32/37/42/47LH70**, 42/47LH90**, 50/60PS70**,
50/60PS80**)
HDMI2
Select L O C K.
2
Select I n p u t B l o c k.
OK
Select input source.
OK
Select O n or O f f.
3
4
5
OK
Save.
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS
OK
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
147
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS
KEY LOCK
The TV can be set so that the remote control is required to control it. This feature can be used to prevent unauthorized viewing.
OPTION
Move
OPTION
Move
: English
Menu Language
: English
Audio Language
: English
Audio Language
: English
Subtitle Language
: English
Subtitle Language
Hard of Hearing(
Country
) : Off
: UK
Input Label
Hard of Hearing(
Country
OK
: English
) : Off
: UK
Input Label
SIMPLINK
Key Lock
: On
: Off
E
1 MENU
OK
Menu Language
SIMPLINK
Key
Key Lock
Lock
E
: On
Off
: Off
: Off
On
On
Select O P T I O N.
O n’, if the TV is turned off, press the r / I,
• In K e y L o c k ‘O
OK
Select K e y L o c k.
OK
Select O n or O f f.
) button on the TV or POWER
INPUT, P D or E(or P
INPUT, P
or NUMBER buttons on the remote control then the set will be turned on.
Key Lock On ’
• With the K e y L o c k O n, the display ‘
appears on the screen if any button on the front panel is
pressed while viewing the TV. (Except for r / I button :
Plasma TV only)
2
3
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS
4
OK
Save.
• Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing.
• Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen.
148
TELETEXT
POWER
ON/OFF
TV/RAD
POWER
This feature is not available in all
countries.
AV MODE
ENERGY SAVING
LIST
Q.VIEW
Teletext is a free service broadcast by most TV
stations which gives up-to-the-minute information on news, weather, television programmes,
share prices and many other topics.
The teletext decoder of this TV can support the
SIMPLE, TOP and FASTEXT systems. SIMPLE
(standard teletext) consists of a number of
pages which are selected by directly entering
the corresponding page number. TOP and FASTEXT are more modern methods allowing quick
and easy selection of teletext information.
MUTE
MENU
RETURN / EXIT
SWITCH ON/OFF
Q.MENU INFO
Press the T E X T button to switch to teletext. The
initial page or last page viewed appears on the
screen.
Two page numbers, TV station name, date and
time are displayed on the screen headline. The
first page number indicates your selection, while
the second shows the current page displayed.
Press the T E X T button to switch off teletext. The
previous mode reappears.
i
GUIDE
FAV
MARK
AV MODE
RATIO
SIMPLE TEXT
A
Page selection
1
Enter the desired page number as a three digit number with the NUMBER buttons. If during selection you
press a wrong number, you must complete the three digit number and then re-enter the correct page number.
The P
button can be used to select the preceding or following page.
2
TOP TEXT
The user guide displays four fields-red, green, yellow and blue at the bottom of the screen. The yellow field
denotes the next group and the blue field indicates the next block.
Block / group / page selection
1
4
With the blue button you can progress from block to block.
Use the yellow button to proceed to the next group with automatic overflow to the next block.
With the green button you can proceed to the next existing page with automatic overflow to the next group.
Alternatively the P button can be used.
The red button returns to the previous selection. Alternatively the P button can be used.
A
Direct page selection
2
3
As with SIMPLE teletext mode, you can select a page by entering it as a three digit number using the NUMBER
buttons in TOP mode.
TELETEXT
A
149
TELETEXT
FASTEXT
The teletext pages are colour coded along the bottom of the screen and are selected by pressing the corresponding coloured button.
A Page selection
1
2
3
4
Press the T . O P T button and then use
button to select i menu. Display the index page.
You can select the pages which are colour coded along the bottom line with corresponding coloured buttons.
AS with SIMPLE teletext mode, you can select a page by entering its three digit page number with the NUMBER buttons in FASTEXT mode.
The P
button can be used to select the preceding or following page.
SPECIAL TELETEXT FUNCTIONS
■
Press the T . O P T button and then use
button to select the Text Option menu.
i
A Index
Select the each index page.
Text Option
Index
Time
A Time
When viewing a TV programme, select this menu to display the time at the top right hand
corner of the screen.
In the teletext mode, press this button to select a sub page number. The sub page number is
displayed at the bottom of the screen. To hold or change the sub page, press the
RED/GREEN,
or NUMBER buttons.
Hold
Reveal
Update
Close
A Hold
Stops the automatic page change which will occur if a teletext page consists of 2 or more sub pages. The number of
sub pages and the sub page displayed is, usually, shown on the screen below the time. When this menu is selected the
stop symbol is displayed at the top left-hand corner of the screen and the automatic page change is inactive.
TELETEXT
?
A Reveal
Select this menu to display concealed information, such as solutions to riddles or puzzles.
A Update
Displays the TV picture on the screen while waiting for a new teletext page. The display will appear at the top left hand
corner of the screen. When the updated page is available then display will change to the page number. Select this menu
again to view the updated teletext page.
150
DIGITAL TELETEXT
*This function works in UK, Ireland only.
The TV gives you access to digital teletext which is greatly improved in various aspects such as text, graphics etc.
This digital teletext can access special digital teletext services and specific services which broadcast digital teletext.
You should select off in the subtitle language menu to display teletext by pressing the SUBTITLE button.
TELETEXT WITHIN DIGITAL SERVICE
1
Press the numeric or P
button to select a digital service which broadcasts digital teletext.
2
Follow the indications on digital teletext and move onto the
next step by pressing TEXT, OK,
, RED,
GREEN, YELLOW, BLUE or NUMBER buttons and etc..
3
To change digital teletext service, select a different service by the numeric or P
button.
TELETEXT IN DIGITAL SERVICE
Press the numeric or P
button to select a certain
service which broadcasts digital teletext.
2
Press the TEXT or coloured button to switch on teletext.
3
Follow the indications on digital teletext and move onto
the next step by pressing OK,
, RED, GREEN,
YELLOW, BLUE or NUMBER buttons and so on.
4
Press the TEXT or colour button to switch off digital teletext and return to TV viewing.
DIGITAL TELETEXT
1
Some services may allow you to access text services by
pressing the RED button.
151
APPENDIX
TROUBLESHOOTING
The TV does not operate properly.
Check to see if there is any object between the TV and the remote control causing
an obstruction. Ensure you are pointing the remote control directly at the TV.
A Ensure that the batteries are installed with correct polarity (+ to +, - to -).
A Install new batteries.
A
The remote control
does not work
Power is suddenly
turned off
Is the sleep timer set?
A Check the power control settings. Has the Power supply been interrupted.
A If the TV is switched on and there is no input signal, it will switch off automatically after 15 minutes.
A
The video function does not work.
Check whether the TV is switched on.
A Try another channel. The problem may be with the broadcast.
A Is the power cord inserted correctly into the mains?
A Check your antenna direction and/or location.
A Test the mains outlet by plugging another TV into the same outlet.
A
No picture & No sound
Picture appears slowly
after switching on
A
This is normal, the image is muted during the TV startup process. Please contact
your service centre, if the picture has not appeared after five minutes.
Adjust Colour in menu option.
A Allow a sufficient distance between the TV and the VCR.
A Try another channel. The problem may be with the broadcast.
A Are the video cables installed properly?
A Activate any function to restore the brightness of the picture.
A
No or poor colour
or poor picture
Horizontal/vertical bars
or picture shaking
APPENDIX
Poor reception on
some channels
Lines or streaks
in pictures
No picture
when connecting HDMI
152
A
Check for local interference such as an electrical appliance or power tool.
Station or cable channel experiencing problems, tune to another station.
Station signal is weak, reposition the antenna to receive weaker stations.
A Check for sources of possible interference.
A
A
A
Check antenna (Change the position of the antenna).
A
Check that your HDMI cable is version 1.3 or higher.
If the HDMI cables don’t support HDMI version 1.3, flickering or no screen display
can result. Please use the latest cables that support at least HDMI version 1.3.
The audio function does not work.
A
Picture OK & No sound
A
A
A
No output from one
of the speakers
+ or - button.
Press the
Sound muted? Press MUTE button.
Try another channel. The problem may be with the broadcast.
Are the audio cables installed properly?
A
Adjust B a l a n c e in menu option.
Unusual sound from
inside the TV
A
A change in ambient humidity or temperature may result in an unusual noise
when the TV is switched on or off and does not indicate a fault with the TV.
No sound when
connecting HDMI
or USB
A
Check HDMI cable over version 1.3.
Check USB cable over version 2.0.
A
*This feature is not available for all models.
There is a problem in PC mode. (Only PC mode applied)
The signal is out of range
(Invalid format)
Vertical bar or stripe on
background &
Horizontal Noise &
Incorrect position
Screen colour is unstable
or single colour
A
Adjust resolution, horizontal frequency, or vertical frequency.
A
Check the input source.
A
Use Auto configure or adjust clock, phase, or H/V position. (Option)
A
Check the signal cable.
Reinstall the PC video card.
A
There is a problem with PICTURE settings.
A
It means that the TV is currently set to S t o r e D e m o mode.
To switch to H o m e u s e mode you should do the followings:
From the TV Menu, choose O P T I O N -> Choose M o d e S e t t i n g -> Choose
H o m e u s e. Now, you have completed switching to the H o m e u s e mode.
APPENDIX
When the user changes
the picture settings, the
TV automatically converts
back to the initial settings
after a certain period of
time.
153
APPENDIX
MAINTENANCE
Early malfunctions can be prevented. Careful and regular cleaning can prolong the life of your new TV.
Caution: Be sure to switch the power off and unplug the power cord before you begin any cleaning.
Cleaning the Screen
1
A good way to keep the dust off your screen for a while is to wet a soft cloth in a mixture of lukewarm water
and a little fabric softener or dish washing detergent. Wring the cloth until it is almost dry, and then use it
to wipe the screen.
2
Ensure there is no excess water on the screen. Allow any water or dampness to evaporate before switching on.
Cleaning the Cabinet
To remove dirt or dust, wipe the cabinet with a soft, dry, lint-free cloth.
A Do not to use a wet cloth.
A
Extended Absence
CAUTION
G
APPENDIX
154
If you expect to leave your TV dormant for prolonged periods (such as a holiday), unplug the power
cord to protect against possible damage from lightning or power surges.
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
32LH40**
MODELS
Dimensions
32LH4000-ZA
37LH40**
32LH4010-ZD
32LH4020-ZC
37LH4000-ZA
37LH4010-ZD
37LH4020-ZC
with stand
804.4 mm x 586.3 mm x 223.8 mm 804.4 mm x 589.1 mm x 210.9 mm
924.7 mm x 666.7 mm x 296.2 mm
924.7 mm x 667.7 mm x 270.6 mm
without stand
804.4 mm x 529.2 mm x 81.0 mm 804.4 mm x 529.2 mm x 81.0 mm
924.7 mm x 599.9 mm x 89.6 mm
924.7 mm x 599.9 mm x 89.6 mm
(Width x Height x Depth)
with stand
without stand
Weight
Power requirement
Power Consumption
12.7 kg
11.5 kg
12.7 kg
11.5 kg
15.8 kg
14.0 kg
15.8 kg
14.0 kg
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
150 W
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
150 W
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
180 W
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
180 W
42LH40**
MODELS
Dimensions
42LH4000-ZA
47LH40**
42LH4010-ZD
42LH4020-ZC
47LH4000-ZA
47LH4010-ZD
47LH4020-ZC
with stand
1036.0 mm x 721.3 mm x 296.2 mm 1036.0 mm x 722.3 mm x 270.6 mm 1153.2 mm x 791.5 mm x 337.4 mm 1153.2 mm x 793.3 mm x 319.0 mm
without stand
1036.0 mm x 655.4 mm x 89.8 mm
1036.0 mm x 655.4 mm x 89.8 mm
1153.2 mm x 719.0 mm x 99.8 mm
1153.2 mm x 719.0 mm x 99.8 mm
with stand
without stand
18.9 kg
17.1 kg
18.9 kg
17.1 kg
22.2 kg
19.6 kg
22.2 kg
19.6 kg
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
210 W
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
210 W
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
280 W
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
280 W
(Width x Height x Depth)
Weight
Power requirement
Power Consumption
CI Module Size
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm
(Width x Height x Depth)
Operating Temperature
Environment condition
■
0°C to 40°C
Operating Humidity
Less than 80 %
Storage Temperature
-20°C to 60°C
Storage Humidity
Less than 85 %
The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
APPENDIX
155
APPENDIX
32LH50**
MODELS
Dimensions
32LH5000-ZB
37LH50**
32LH5010-ZD
32LH5020-ZE
37LH5000-ZB
37LH5010-ZD
37LH5020-ZE
with stand
815.0 mm x 583.8 mm x 223.8 mm 815.0 mm x 585.6 mm x 210.9 mm
940.8 mm x 665.2 mm x 296.2 mm 940.8 mm x 666.2 mm x 270.6 mm
without stand
815.0 mm x 529.6 mm x 82.0 mm
815.0 mm x 529.6 mm x 82.0 mm
940.8 mm x 603.5 mm x 90.6 mm
940.8 mm x 603.5 mm x 90.6 mm
with stand
without stand
12.6 kg
11.4 kg
12.6 kg
11.4 kg
16.3 kg
14.5 kg
16.3 kg
14.5 kg
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
150 W
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
150 W
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
180 W
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
180 W
(Width x Height x Depth)
Weight
Power requirement
Power Consumption
42LH50**
MODELS
Dimensions
42LH5000-ZB
47LH50**
42LH5010-ZD
42LH5020-ZE
47LH5000-ZB
47LH5010-ZD
47LH5020-ZE
with stand
1052.2 mm x 719.1 mm x 296.2 mm 1052.2 mm x 720.1 mm x 270.6 mm
1173.4 mm x 789.7 mm x 337.4 mm
1173.4 mm x 791.4 mm x 319.0 mm
without stand
1052.2 mm x 657.3 mm x 90.8 mm
1052.2 mm x 657.3 mm x 90.8 mm
1173.4 mm x 723.4 mm x 100.8 mm
1173.4 mm x 723.4 mm x 100.8 mm
with stand
without stand
19.0 kg
17.2 kg
19.0 kg
17.2 kg
23.4 kg
20.8 kg
23.6 kg
20.8 kg
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
210 W
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
210 W
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
260 W
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
260 W
(Width x Height x Depth)
Weight
Power requirement
Power Consumption
CI Module Size
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm
(Width x Height x Depth)
Operating Temperature
Environment condition
Supported movie files
■
APPENDIX
156
Operating Humidity
0°C to 40°C
Less than 80 %
Storage Temperature
-20°C to 60°C
Storage Humidity
Less than 85 %
Refer to p.104
The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
55LH50**
MODELS
Dimensions
55LH5000-ZB
with stand
1357.0 mm x 901.0 mm x 423.0 mm
without stand
1357.0 mm x 835.4 mm x 109.6 mm
with stand
without stand
36.4 kg
32.9 kg
(Width x Height x Depth)
Weight
Power requirement
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
350 W
Power Consumption
MODELS
Dimensions
42LH90**
47LH90**
42LH9000-ZA
47LH9000-ZA
with stand
1065.9 mm x 776 mm x 361.7 mm
1179 mm x 851.4 mm x 398.8 mm
without stand
1065.9 mm x 716.4 mm x 94.4 mm
1179 mm x 780.6 mm x 105.9 mm
with stand
without stand
23.2 kg
19.5 kg
27.3 kg
23.5 kg
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
190 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
220 W
(Width x Height x Depth)
Weight
Power requirement
Power Consumption
CI Module Size
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm
(Width x Height x Depth)
Operating Temperature
Environment condition
Less than 80 %
Storage Temperature
-20°C to 60°C
Storage Humidity
Supported movie files
■
0°C to 40°C
Operating Humidity
Less than 85 %
Refer to p.104
The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
APPENDIX
157
APPENDIX
19LG31**
22LG31**
26LG31**
19LG3100-ZA
22LG3100-ZA
26LG3100-ZA
MODELS
Dimensions
with stand
458.8 mm x 391.0 mm x 189.2 mm
522.2 mm x 431.5 mm x 189.0 mm
663.3 mm x 508.2 mm x 227.3 mm
without stand
458.8 mm x 344.5 mm x 69.0 mm
522.2 mm x 384.2 mm x 69.0 mm
663.3 mm x 449.8 mm x 80.0 mm
with stand
without stand
4.5 kg
4.2 kg
5.6 kg
5.34 kg
10.1 kg
8.6 kg
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
50 W
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
55 W
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
110 W
(Width x Height x Depth)
Weight
Power requirement
Power Consumption
32LG33**
37LG33**
42LG33**
32LG3300-ZA
37LG3300-ZA
42LG3300-ZA
MODELS
with stand
801.8mmx 604.2mmx 227.3 mm
919.6 mm x 682.3 mm x 293.8 mm
1032.8 mm x 742.3 mm x 293.8 mm
without stand
801.8mmx 544.1mmx 79.0 mm
919.6 mm x 610.3 mm x 89.0 mm
1032.8 mm x 670.1 mm x 92.0 mm
with stand
without stand
13.4 kg
18.8 kg
11.9 kg
16.2 kg
23.6 kg
21.0 kg
Power requirement
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
Power Consumption
150 W
180 W
Dimensions
(Width x Height x Depth)
Weight
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
210 W
32LF51**
42LF51**
47LF51**
32LF5100-ZA
42LF5100-ZA
47LF5100-ZA
MODELS
with stand
813.8 mm x 598.8 mm x 227.3 mm
1034.0 mm x 735.0 mm x 293.8 mm
1156.2 mm x 813.1 mm x 342.9 mm
without stand
813.8 mm x 540.4 mm x 79.0 mm
1034.0 mm x 663.0 mm x 92.0 mm
1156.2 mm x 739.2 mm x 103.0 mm
with stand
without stand
14.1 kg
22.5 kg
29.2 kg
12.6 kg
20.0 kg
24.6 kg
Power requirement
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
Power Consumption
150 W
210 W
280 W
Dimensions
(Width x Height x Depth)
Weight
CI Module Size
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm
(Width x Height x Depth)
APPENDIX
Operating Temperature
Environment condition
■
158
Operating Humidity
0°C to 40°C
Less than 80 %
Storage Temperature
-20°C to 60°C
Storage Humidity
Less than 85 %
The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
MODELS
Dimensions
19LU50**
22LU50**
26LU50**
19LU5000-ZA
19U5010-ZB
19LU5020-ZC
22LU5000-ZA
22U5010-ZB
22LU5020-ZC
26LU5000-ZA
26U5010-ZB
26LU5020-ZC
with stand
462.0 mm x 373.0 mm x 182.0 mm
529.1 mm x 416.6 mm x 196.0 mm
668.0 mm x 538.3 mm x 236 mm
without stand
462.0 mm x 305.0 mm x 65.0 mm
529.1 mm x 342.3 mm x 65.0 mm
668.0 mm x 456.0 mm x 81.0 mm
with stand
without stand
4.4 kg
3.7 kg
5.4 kg
4.6 kg
8.9 kg
7.7 kg
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
40 W
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
55 W
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
110 W
(Width x Height x Depth)
Weight
Power requirement
Power Consumption
19LU40**
MODELS
Dimensions
19LU4000-ZB
22LU40**
19LU4010-ZC
22LU4000-ZB
22LU4010-ZC
with stand
474.0 mm x 390.0 mm x 182.0 mm 474.0 mm x 390.0 mm x 182.0 mm
542.9 mm x 429.3 mm x 196.0 mm 542.9 mm x 429.3 mm x 196.0 mm
without stand
474.0 mm x 357.9 mm x 65.0 mm
474.0 mm x 357.9 mm x 65.0 mm
542.9 mm x 397.8 mm x 65.0 mm
542.9 mm x 397.8 mm x 65.0 mm
with stand
without stand
4.4 kg
3.9 kg
4.4 kg
3.9 kg
5.5 kg
5.0 kg
5.5 kg
5.0 kg
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
40 W
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
40 W
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
55 W
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
55 W
(Width x Height x Depth)
Weight
Power requirement
Power Consumption
CI Module Size
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm
(Width x Height x Depth)
Operating Temperature
Environment condition
■
Operating Humidity
0°C to 40°C
Less than 80 %
Storage Temperature
-20°C to 60°C
Storage Humidity
Less than 85 %
The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
APPENDIX
159
APPENDIX
19LH20**
22LH20**
19LH2000-ZA / 19LH2010-ZB
19LH2020-ZC / 19LH201C-ZA
22LH2000-ZA / 22LH2010-ZB
22LH2020-ZC / 22LH201C-ZA
with stand
462.4 mm x 353.0 mm x 171.0 mm
533.4 mm x 397.0 mm x 171.0 mm
without stand
462.4 mm x 308.0 mm x 65.0 mm
533.4 mm x 351.7 mm x 65.0 mm
with stand
without stand
3.8 kg
3.6 kg
4.8 kg
4.6 kg
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
40 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
55 W
26LH20**
26LH2000-ZA
26LH2010-ZB
26LH2020-ZC
26LH201C-ZA
32LH20**
32LH2000-ZA
32LH2010-ZB
32LH2020-ZC
32LH201C-ZA
MODELS
Dimensions
(Width x Height x Depth)
Weight
Power requirement
Power Consumption
MODELS
Dimensions
with stand
667.0 mm x 504.0 mm x 224.0 mm
667.0 mm x 507.0 mm x 211.0 mm 805.0 mm x 583.0 mm x 224.0 mm 805.0 mm x 586.0 mm x 211.0 mm
without stand
667.0 mm x 446.2 mm x 80.0 mm
667.0 mm x 446.2 mm x 80.0 mm 805.0 mm x 528.0 mm x 79.9mm
with stand
without stand
8.9 kg
7.8 kg
8.9 kg
7.8 kg
11.5 kg
10.3 kg
11.5 kg
10.3 kg
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
110 W
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
110 W
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
150 W
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
150 W
(Width x Height x Depth)
Weight
Power requirement
Power Consumption
MODELS
Dimensions
37LH20**
37LH2000-ZA
37LH2010-ZB
37LH2020-ZC
37LH201C-ZA
805.0 mm x 528.0 mm x 79.9mm
42LH20**
42LH2000-ZA
42LH2010-ZB
42LH2020-ZC
42LH201C-ZA
with stand
922.0 mm x 659.0 mm x 297.0 mm 922.0 mm x 660.0 mm x 270.6 mm 1028.0 mm x 715.4 mm x 297.0 mm 1028.0 mm x 716.4 mm x 270.6 mm
without stand
922.0 mm x 595.0 mm x 88.0 mm
with stand
without stand
14.8 kg
13.0 kg
14.8 kg
13.0 kg
18.0 kg
16.2 kg
18.0 kg
16.2 kg
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
180 W
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
180 W
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
210 W
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
210 W
(Width x Height x Depth)
Weight
Power requirement
Power Consumption
CI Module Size
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm
(Width x Height x Depth)
APPENDIX
Operating Temperature
Environment condition
■
160
922.0 mm x 595.0 mm x 88.0 mm 1028.0 mm x 655.0 mm x 88.7 mm 1028.0 mm x 655.0 mm x 88.7 mm
Operating Humidity
0°C to 40°C
Less than 80 %
Storage Temperature
-20°C to 60°C
Storage Humidity
Less than 85 %
The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
MODELS
Dimensions
32LH3***
32LH3010-ZB/
32LH3000-ZA
32LH3030-ZE/
32LH3020-ZD
32LH3040-ZG
32LH3800-ZD
32LH301C-ZA
37LH3***
37LH3010-ZB/
37LH3030-ZE/
37LH3040-ZG
37LH3000-ZA
37LH3020-ZD
37LH3800-ZD
37LH301C-ZA
with stand
805.0 mm x 583.0 mm x 224.0 mm 805.0 mm x 586.0 mm x 211.0 mm 922.0 mm x 659.0 mm x 297.0 mm 922.0 mm x 660.0 mm x 270.6 mm
without stand
805.0 mm x 531.0 mm x 79.9 mm 805.0 mm x 531.0 mm x 79.9 mm 922.0 mm x 595.0 mm x 88.0 mm 922.0 mm x 595.0 mm x 88.0 mm
(Width x Height x Depth)
with stand
without stand
Weight
Power requirement
Power Consumption
MODELS
Dimensions
12.1 kg
11.0 kg
12.1 kg
11.0 kg
14.9 kg
13.1 kg
14.9 kg
13.1 kg
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
150 W, 110 W (32LH3800)
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
150 W
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
180 W, 120 W (37LH3800)
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
180 W
42LH3***
42LH3000-ZA
42LH3010-ZB/
42LH3020-ZD
42LH3030-ZE/
42LH3800-ZD
42LH3040-ZG
42LH301C-ZA
47LH3***
47LH3000-ZA
47LH3010-ZB/
47LH3020-ZD
47LH3030-ZE/
47LH3040-ZG
47LH301C-ZA
with stand
1028.0 mm x 715.4 mm x 297.0 mm 1028.0 mm x 716.4 mm x 270.6 mm 1140.6 mm x 784.8 mm x 337.4 mm 1140.6 mm x 788.3 mm x 318.9 mm
without stand
1028.0 mm x 658.6 mm x 88.7 mm 1028.0 mm x 658.6 mm x 88.7 mm 1140.6 mm x 722.9 mm x 99.0 mm 1140.6 mm x 722.9 mm x 99.0 mm
(Width x Height x Depth)
Weight
with stand
without stand
Power requirement
Power Consumption
CI Module Size
Operating Temperature
■
18.0 kg
16.2 kg
22.5 kg
19.9 kg
22.5 kg
19.9 kg
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
210 W, 150 W (42LH3800)
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
210 W
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
280 W
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
280 W
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm
(Width x Height x Depth)
Environment condition
18.0 kg
16.2 kg
Operating Humidity
0°C to 40°C
Less than 80 %
Storage Temperature
-20°C to 60°C
Storage Humidity
Less than 85 %
The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
APPENDIX
161
APPENDIX
32LH70**
32LH7000-ZA/32LH7010-ZD
32LH7020-ZC/32LH7030-ZE
37LH70**
37LH7000-ZA/37LH7010-ZD
37LH7020-ZC/37LH7030-ZE
803 mm x 632.9 mm x 284.8 mm
903 mm x 689.1 mm x 299.5 mm
without stand
803 mm x 584.2 mm x 75mm
903 mm x 639.4 mm x 51.8 mm
with stand
without stand
13.5 kg
11.6 kg
16.2 kg
14.1 kg
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
150 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
180 W
42LH70**
47LH70**
42LH7000-ZA/42LH7010-ZD
42LH7020-ZC/42LH7030-ZE
47LH7000-ZA/47LH7010-ZD
47LH7020-ZC/47LH7030-ZE
with stand
1009.7 mm x 753.6 mm x 334.4 mm
1123.5 mm x 823.4 mm x 372.8 mm
without stand
1009.7 mm x 695.4 mm x 39.7 mm
1123.5 mm x 765.4 mm x 40.9 mm
with stand
without stand
19.8 kg
17.2 kg
26.4 kg
22.8 kg
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
230 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
300 W
MODELS
with stand
Dimensions
(Width x Height x Depth)
Weight
Power requirement
Power Consumption
MODELS
Dimensions
(Width x Height x Depth)
Weight
Power requirement
Power Consumption
CI Module Size
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm
(Width x Height x Depth)
Operating Temperature
Environment condition
Supported movie files
■
APPENDIX
162
Operating Humidity
0°C to 40°C
Less than 80 %
Storage Temperature
-20°C to 60°C
Storage Humidity
Less than 85 %
Refer to p.104
The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
32LH49**
37LH49**
32LH4900-ZD
37LH4900-ZD
804.4 mm x 589.1 mm x 210.9 mm
924.7 mm x 667.7 mm x 270.6mm
without stand
804.4 mm x 529.2 mm x 81.0mm
924.7 mm x 599.9 mm x 89.6mm
with stand
without stand
12.7 kg
11.5 kg
15.8 kg
14.0 kg
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
150 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
180 W
42LH49**
47LH49**
42LH4900-ZD
47LH4900-ZD
MODELS
with stand
Dimensions
(Width x Height x Depth)
Weight
Power requirement
Power Consumption
MODELS
Dimensions
1036.0 mm x 722.3 mm x 270.6 mm
1153.2 mm x 793.3 mm x 319.0mm
without stand
1036.0 mm x 655.4 mm x 89.8mm
1153.2 mm x 719.0 mm x 99.8mm
with stand
without stand
18.9 kg
17.1 kg
22.2 kg
19.6 kg
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
210 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
260 W
with stand
(Width x Height x Depth)
Weight
Power requirement
Power Consumption
CI Module Size
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm
(Width x Height x Depth)
Operating Temperature
Environment condition
Less than 80 %
Storage Temperature
-20°C to 60°C
Storage Humidity
Supported movie files
■
0°C to 40°C
Operating Humidity
Less than 85 %
Refer to p.104
The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
APPENDIX
163
APPENDIX
32LF25**
MODELS
37LF25**
32LF2500-ZA
32LF2510-ZB
37LF2500-ZA
37LF2510-ZB
with stand
801.8 mm x 604.2 mm x 227.8 mm
801.8 mm x 604.2 mm x 227.3 mm
919.6 mm x 682.3 mm x 289.0 mm
919.6 mm x 682.3 mm x 293.8 mm
without stand
801.8 mm x 544.1 mm x 79.0 mm
801.8 mm x 544.1 mm x 79.0 mm
919.6 mm x 610.3 mm x 89.0 mm
919.6 mm x 610.3 mm x 89.0 mm
with stand
without stand
13.4 kg
13.4 kg
18.8 kg
18.8 kg
11.9 kg
11.9 kg
16.2 kg
16.2 kg
Power requirement
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
Power Consumption
150 W
150 W
180 W
180 W
Dimensions
(Width x Height x Depth)
Weight
42LF25**
MODELS
Dimensions
42LF2500-ZA
42LF2510-ZB
with stand
1032.8 mm x 742.3 mm x 289.0 mm
1032.8 mm x 742.3 mm x 293.8 mm
without stand
1032.8 mm x 670.1 mm x 92.0 mm
1032.8 mm x 670.1 mm x 92.0 mm
with stand
without stand
23.6 kg
21.0 kg
23.6 kg
21.0 kg
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
210 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
210 W
(Width x Height x Depth)
Weight
Power requirement
Power Consumption
CI Module Size
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm
(Width x Height x Depth)
Operating Temperature
Environment condition
■
APPENDIX
164
Operating Humidity
0°C to 40°C
Less than 80 %
Storage Temperature
-20°C to 60°C
Storage Humidity
Less than 85 %
The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
MODELS
32LG2***
37LG2***
42LG2***
32LG2100-ZA
32LG2200-ZA
37LG2100-ZA
42LG2100-ZA
with stand
801.8 mm x 604.2 mm x 227.3 mm
919.6 mm x 682.3 mm x 293.8 mm
1032.8 mm x 742.3 mm x 293.8 mm
without stand
801.8 mm x 544.1 mm x 79.0 mm
919.6 mm x 610.3 mm x 89.0 mm
1032.8 mm x 670.1 mm x 92.0 mm
with stand
without stand
13.4 kg
18.8 kg
11.9 kg
16.2 kg
23.6 kg
21.0 kg
Power requirement
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
Power Consumption
150 W
180 W
Dimensions
(Width x Height x Depth)
Weight
19LD3**
22LD3**
19LD320-ZA
22LD320-ZA
with stand
462.4 mm x 353.0 mm x 171.0 mm
533.4 mm x 397.0 mm x 171.0 mm
without stand
462.4 mm x 308.0 mm x 65.0 mm
533.4 mm x 351.7 mm x 65.0 mm
with stand
without stand
3.8 kg
3.6 kg
4.8 kg
4.6 kg
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
30 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
50 W
26LD3**
32LD3**
26LD320-ZA
32LD320-ZA
with stand
667.0 mm x 504.0 mm x 224.0 mm
805.0 mm x 583.0 mm x 224.0 mm
without stand
667.0 mm x 446.2 mm x 80.0 mm
805.0 mm x 528.0 mm x 79.9 mm
with stand
without stand
8.9 kg
7.8 kg
11.5 kg
10.3 kg
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
100 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
120 W
MODELS
Dimensions
AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz
210 W
(Width x Height x Depth)
Weight
Power requirement
Power Consumption
MODELS
Dimensions
(Width x Height x Depth)
Weight
Power requirement
Power Consumption
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm
(Width x Height x Depth)
Operating Temperature
Environment condition
■
Operating Humidity
0°C to 40°C
Less than 80 %
Storage Temperature
-20°C to 60°C
Storage Humidity
Less than 85 %
The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
APPENDIX
CI Module Size
165
APPENDIX
50PS70**
60PS70**
50PS7000-ZA
60PS7000-ZA
with stand
1228.8 mm x 835.8 mm x 309 mm
1465.4 mm x 986.4 mm x 371 mm
without stand
1228.8 mm x 784.5 mm x 78.9 mm
1465.4 mm x 932.2 mm x 82.1 mm
with stand
without stand
38.1 kg
34.1 kg
53.3 kg
46.3 kg
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
490 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
580 W
50PS80**
60PS80**
50PS8000-ZA
60PS8000-ZA
MODELS
Dimensions
(Width x Height x Depth)
Weight
Power requirement
Power Consumption
MODELS
Dimensions
with stand
1228.8 mm x 835.8 mm x 309 mm
1465.4 mm x 986.4 mm x 371 mm
without stand
1228.8 mm x 795.1 mm x 78.9 mm
1465.4 mm x 926.7 mm x 82.1 mm
with stand
without stand
38.3 kg
34.3 kg
53.6 kg
46.6 kg
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
490 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
580 W
(Width x Height x Depth)
Weight
Power requirement
Power Consumption
CI Module Size
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm
(Width x Height x Depth)
Operating Temperature
Environment condition
Supported movie files
■
APPENDIX
166
0°C to 40°C
Operating Humidity
Less than 80 %
Storage Temperature
-20°C to 60°C
Storage Humidity
Less than 85 %
Refer to p.104
The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
MODELS
Dimensions
42PQ35**
50PQ35**
42PQ3500-ZB
50PQ3500-ZB
1031.2 mm x 720.9 mm x 308.0 mm
1216.7 mm x 818.1 mm x 353.0 mm
without stand
1031.2 mm x 656.7 mm x 80.8mm
1216.7 mm x 759.0 mm x 83.0 mm
with stand
without stand
24.3 kg
22.2 kg
33.7 kg
31.2 kg
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
320 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
430 W
with stand
(Width x Height x Depth)
Weight
Power requirement
Power Consumption
CI Module Size
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm
(Width x Height x Depth)
Operating Temperature
Environment condition
Supported movie files
■
0°C to 40°C
Operating Humidity
Less than 80 %
Storage Temperature
-20°C to 60°C
Storage Humidity
Less than 85 %
Refer to p.104
The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
APPENDIX
167
APPENDIX
MODELS
Dimensions
42PQ65**
50PS65**
42PQ6500-ZA
50PS6500-ZA
with stand
1040.8 mm x 725.8 mm x 308 mm
1228.8 mm x 824.6 mm x 353.0 mm
without stand
1040.8 mm x 669.2 mm x 76.8 mm
1228.8 mm x 772.0 mm x 78.9 mm
with stand
without stand
25.3 kg
23.3 kg
36.3 kg
33.8 kg
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
320 W
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
490 W
(Width x Height x Depth)
Weight
Power requirement
Power Consumption
CI Module Size
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm
(Width x Height x Depth)
Operating Temperature
Environment condition
0°C to 40°C
Operating Humidity
Less than 80 %
Storage Temperature
-20°C to 60°C
Storage Humidity
Less than 85 %
Refer to p.104
Supported movie files
■
The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.
Television System
Program Coverage
Digital TV
Analogue TV
DVB-T
PAL/SECAM B/G/D/K, PAL I/II,
DVB-C (Sweden, Finland only)
SECAM L/L’
VHF, UHF
VHF: E2 to E12, UHF: E21 to E69,
CATV: S1 to S20, HYPER: S21 to S47
External Antenna Impedance
APPENDIX
168
75 Ω
75 Ω
IR CODES
*This feature is not available for all models.
Code (Hexa)
95
08
0B
79
F0
45
43
AB
40
41
07
06
44
28
AA
30
02
03
1E
09
00
01
10~19
53
1A
72
71
63
61
20
21
39
7E
65
Function
Energy Saving
POWER
INPUT
RATIO
TV/RAD
Q.MENU
MENU
GUIDE
Up ( )
Down ( )
Left ( )
Right ( )
OK( )
RETURN/EXIT
INFO i
AV MODE
+
FAV ( MARK )
MUTE
P
P
Number Key 0~9
LIST
Q.VIEW
RED Key
GREEN Key
YELLOW Key
BLUE Key
TEXT
T.OPT(T.Option)
SUBTITLE
SIMPLINK
FREEZE
Note
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON(POWER ON/OFF)
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
R/C BUTTON
APPENDIX
169
APPENDIX
EXTERNAL CONTROL DEVICE SETUP
RS-232C Setup
Connect the RS-232C (serial port) input jack to an
external control device (such as a computer or an A/V
control system) to control the product’s functions
externally.
Connect the serial port of the control device to the
RS-232C jack on the product back panel.
Note: RS-232C connection cables are not supplied
with the product.
Type of Connector; D-Sub 9-Pin Male
No.
Pin Name
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
No connection
RXD (Receive data)
TXD (Transmit data)
DTR (DTE side ready)
GND
DSR (DCE side ready)
RTS (Ready to send)
CTS (Clear to send)
1
5
6
9
No Connection
RS-232C Configurations
7-Wire Configurations (Standard RS-232C cable)
APPENDIX
170
RXD
TXD
GND
DTR
DSR
RTS
CTS
PC
TV
2
3
5
4
6
7
8
3
2
5
6
4
8
7
D-Sub 9
D-Sub 9
TXD
RXD
GND
DSR
DTR
CTS
RTS
3-Wire Configurations(Not standard)
RXD
TXD
GND
DTR
DSR
RTS
CTS
PC
TV
2
3
5
4
6
7
8
3
2
5
6
4
7
8
D-Sub 9
D-Sub 9
TXD
RXD
GND
DTR
DSR
RTS
CTS
Set ID
Use this function to specify a set ID number.
Refer to ‘Real Data Mapping’. G p .175
OPTION
Move
OK
OPTION
E
SIMPLINK
: On
Key Lock
: Off
Key Lock
: Off
::11
Simple Manual
Set ID
ID
Set
::11
Set ID
ID
Set
OK
E
: On
Simple Manual
Power Indicator
Power Indicator
F
Demo Mode
: On
Demo Mode
: On
Mode Setting
: Store Demo
Mode Setting
: Store Demo
1
G
Close
Factory Reset
Factory Reset
1 MENU
Move
SIMPLINK
Select O P T I O N.
2
OK
3
OK
Select S e t I D.
Adjust Set ID to choose the desired TV ID number.
The adjustment range of SET ID is 1 to 99.
APPENDIX
• Press R E T U R N to move to the previous menu screen.
171
APPENDIX
Communication Parameters
Baud rate : 9600 bps (UART)
A Data length : 8 bits
A Parity : None
Stop bit : 1 bit
A Communication code : ASCII code
A Use a crossed (reverse) cable.
A
A
Transmission / Receiving Protocol
Transmission
[Command1][Command2][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Command Reference List
COMMAND COMMAND
DATA
1
2
(Hexadecimal)
APPENDIX
172
01. Power
02. Aspect Ratio
03. Screen Mute
04. Volume Mute
05. Volume Control
06. Contrast
07. Brightness
08. Colour
09. Tint
10. Sharpness
11. OSD Select
12. Remote control lock mode
13. Treble
14. Bass
15. Balance
16. Colour Temperature
17. ISM Method
18. Energy Saving
19. Auto Configuration
20. Tune Command
21. Programme Add/Skip
22. Key
23. Control Back Light
24. Input select (Main)
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
j
j
j
m
m
m
m
x
a
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
r
s
t
u
p
q
u
a
b
c
g
b
00 to 01
Refer to p. 173
00 to 01
00 to 01
00 to 64
00 to 64
00 to 64
00 to 64
00 to 64
00 to 64
00 to 01
00 to 01
00 to 64
00 to 64
00 to 64
00 to 02
Refer to p. 175
00 to 04
01
Refer to p. 175
00 to 01
Key Code
00 to 64
Refer to p. 176
* When setting the 17 to 24, a menu does not appear on screen.
* Note : During USB operations such as Dvix or EMF, all commands except Power(ka) and Key(mc) are not executed and
treated as NG.
* [Command 1] : First command to control the TV.
(j, k, m or x)
[Command
2]
:
Second
command to control the TV.
*
: You can adjust the set ID to choose
* [Set ID]
desired monitor ID number in option
menu. Adjustment range is 1 to 99.
When selecting Set ID ‘0’, every connected set is controlled.
Set ID is indicated as decimal (1 to 99) on
menu and as Hexa decimal (0x0 to 0x63)
on transmission/receiving protocol.
: To transmit command data.
* [DATA]
Transmit ‘FF’ data to read status of command.
[Cr]
:
Carriage
Return
*
ASCII code ‘0x0D’
: ASCII code ‘space (0x20)’
* [ ]
OK Acknowledgement
[Command2][ ][Set ID][ ][OK][Data][x]
* The set transmits ACK (acknowledgement) based on
this format when receiving normal data. At this time, if
the data is data read mode, it indicates present status
data. If the data is data write mode, it returns the
data of the PC computer.
Error Acknowledgement
[Command2][ ][Set ID][ ][NG][Data][x]
* The set transmits ACK (acknowledgement) based on
this format when receiving abnormal data from
non-viable functions or communication errors.
Data 00: Illegal Code
01. Power (Command: k a)
0 4 . V o l u m e M u t e (C o m m a n d : k e )
G To control Power On/Off of the set.
G To control volume mute on/off.
Transmission
[k][a][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
You can also adjust mute using the MUTE button on
remote control.
Transmission
Data 00 : Power Off
Ack
[k][e][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
01 : Power On
G To show Power On/Off.
Data 00 : Volume mute on (Volume off)
01 : Volume mute off (Volume on)
Ack
Transmission
[e][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
[a][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
[k][a][ ][Set ID][ ][FF][Cr]
0 5 . V o l u m e C o n t r o l (C o m m a n d : k f )
Ack
G To adjust volume.
[a][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
* Similarly, if other functions transmit ‘0xFF’ data based
on this format, Acknowledgement data feed back presents status about each function.
* OK Ack., Error Ack. and other message may display on
the screen when TV is power On.
0 2 . A s p e c t R a t i o (C o m m a n d : k c ) ( M a i n P i c t u r e S i z e )
G To adjust the screen format. (Main picture format)
You can also adjust the screen format using the
A s p e c t R a t i o in the Q.MENU. or PICTURE menu.
Transmission
[k][c][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data 01 : Normal screen (4:3)
02 : Wide screen (16:9)
04 : Zoom
06 : Original
Ack
07 : 14:9
09 : Just Scan
0B : Full Wide
10 to 1F :Cinema Zom 1 to 16
You can also adjust volume with the VOLUME buttons on
remote control.
Transmission
[k][f][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Min : 00 to Max : 64
* Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 175.
Ack
[f][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
0 6 . C o n t r a s t (C o m m a n d : k g )
G To adjust screen contrast.
You can also adjust contrast in the PICTURE menu.
Transmission
[k][g][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Min : 00 to Max : 64
* Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 175.
Ack
[g][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
[c][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
0 7 . B r i g h t n e s s (C o m m a n d : k h )
G To adjust screen brightness.
You can also adjust brightness in the PICTURE menu.
Transmission
* Using the PC input, you select either 16:9 or 4:3
screen aspect ratio.
* In DTV/HDMI (1080i 50 Hz / 60 Hz, 720p 50 Hz /
60 Hz, 1080p 24 Hz / 30 Hz / 50 Hz / 60 Hz),
Component(720p, 1080i, 1080p 50 Hz / 60 Hz)
mode, Just Scan is available.
* F u l l W i d e is supported only for Analogue, AV1, 2, 3.
0 3 . S c r e e n M u t e (C o m m a n d : k d )
Data Min : 00 to Max : 64
* Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 175.
Ack
G To select screen mute on/off.
[h][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
[k][h][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
0 8 . C o l o u r (C o m m a n d : k i )
[k][d][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data 00 : Screen mute off (Picture on)
Video mute off
01 : Screen mute on (Picture off)
10 : Video mute on
G To adjust the screen colour.
Ack
[d][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
* In case of video mute on only, TV will display On Screen
Display(OSD). But, in case of Screen mute on, TV will not
display OSD.
You can also adjust colour in the PICTURE menu.
Transmission
[k][i][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Min : 00 to Max : 64
* Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 175.
Ack
APPENDIX
Transmission
[i][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
173
APPENDIX
0 9 . T i n t (C o m m a n d : k j )
G To adjust the screen tint.
You can also adjust tint in the PICTURE menu.
13. Treble (Command: k r)
G To adjust treble.
Transmission
You can also adjust treble in the AUDIO menu.
Transmission
[k][j][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
[k][r][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Red : 00 to Green : 64
* Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 175.
Ack
Data Min : 00 to Max : 64
* Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 175.
[j][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
Ack
[r][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
1 4 . Bass (Command: k s)
1 0 . S h a r p n e s s (C o m m a n d : k k )
G To adjust the screen sharpness.
You can also adjust sharpness in the PICTURE menu.
Transmission
[k][k][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Min : 00 to Max : 64
* Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 175.
Ack
[k][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
G To adjust bass.
You can also adjust bass in the AUDIO menu.
Transmission
[k][s][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Min : 00 to Max : 64
* Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 175.
Ack
[s][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
1 5 . B a l a n c e (C o m m a n d : k t )
G To adjust balance.
1 1 . O S D S e l e c t (C o m m a n d : k l )
G To select OSD (On Screen Display) on/off when controlling remotely.
You can also adjust balance in the AUDIO menu.
Transmission
Transmission
Data Min : 00 to Max : 64
* Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 175.
Ack
[k][l][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data 00 : OSD off
Ack
01 : OSD on
[k][t][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
[t][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
[l][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
1 6 . C o l o u r T e m p e r a t u r e (C o m m a n d : k u )
1 2 . Remote control lock mode ( C o m m a n d : k m )
G To lock the front panel controls on the monitor and
remote control.
Transmission
APPENDIX
174
Temperature in the PICTURE menu.
Transmission
[k][u][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
[k][m][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data 00 : Lock off
Ack
G To adjust colour temperature. You can also adjust Colour
01 : Lock on
[m][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
* If you are not using the remote control, use this mode.
When main power is on/off, external control lock is
released.
* Local Power Key will work properly.
Data 00: Medium 01:Cool
Ack
02: Warm
[u][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
19. Auto Configure(Command: j u)
17. ISM Method (Plasma TV only)
(Command: j p)
G To adjust picture position and minimize image shaking
G To control the ISM method. You can also adjust ISM
Method in OPTION menu.
Transmission
automatically. It works only in RGB (PC) mode.
Transmission
[j][u][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
[j][p][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data 01: To set
Ack
Data 02: Orbiter
04: White wash
08: Normal
20: Colour Wash
[u][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
20.Tune Command (Command: m a)
Ack
G Select channel to following physical number.
[p][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
Transmission
[m][a][ ][Set ID][ ][Data0][ ][Data1][ ][Data2][Cr]
18. Energy Saving (Command: j q)
G To reduce the power consumption of the TV. You can also
adjust Energy Saving in OPTION menu.
Transmission
[j][q][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Power Saving
Function
Level
Description
7 6 5 4
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 Low Power
0 0 0 0
Off
0 0 0 0 Low Power
0 0 0 1
Minimum
0 0 0 0 Low Power
0 0 1 0
Medium
0 0 0 0 Low Power
0 0 1 1
Maximum
0 0 0 0 Low Power
0 1 0 0
Auto
Screen Off
0 1 0 1 (LCD TV/LED
0 0 0 0 Low Power
LCD TV only)
Intelligent
Sensor
Low(Plasma
TV only)
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 0 1 Intelligent Sensor 0 0 0 1
Middle(Plasma TV only)
0 0 0 1 Intelligent Sensor 0 0 1 0 High(Plasma TV only)
Data00 : High channel data
Data01 : Low channel data
ex. No. 47 -> 00 2F (2FH)
No. 394 -> 01 8A (18AH),
DTV No. 0 -> Don’t care
Data02 : 0x00 : Analogue Main
0x10 : DTV Main
0x20 : Radio
Channel data range
Analogue - Min: 00 to Max: 63 (0 to 99)
Digital - Min: 00 to Max: 3E7 (0 to 999)
(Except For Sweden, Finland, Norway, Denmark, Ireland)
Digital - Min: 00 to Max: 270F (0 to 9999)
(Only Sweden, Finland, Norway, Denmark, Ireland)
Ack
[a][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
Data Min: 00 to Max: 7DH
21. Programme Add/Skip(Command: m b)
G To set skip status for the current Programme.
Transmission
[m][b][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data 00 : Skip
01 : Add
Ack
[b][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
Ack
[q][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
* Real data mapping 1
00 :
Step 0
A : Step 10 (Set ID 10)
F : Step 15 (Set ID 15)
10 : Step 16 (Set ID 16)
64 : Step 100
6E : Step 110
73 : Step 115
74 : Step 116
* Real data mapping 2
00 :-40
01 :-39
02 :-38
28 :0
4E : +38
4F : +39
50 : +40
APPENDIX
(except for 19/22LU40**,
19/22/26LU50**,
32/37/42LF25**,
32/37/42LG2***,
32/37/42LG33**,
19/22/26LG31**,
19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**,
19/22/26/32LD3**,
32/37/42/47LH3***,
50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**,
42/50PQ35**, 42PQ65**,
50PS65**)
C7: Step 199
FE : Step 254
FF : Step 255
175
APPENDIX
22. Key(Command: m c)
G To send IR remote key code.
Transmission
[m][c][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Key code - Refer to page 169.
Ack
[c][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
2 4 . I n p u t s e l e c t (C o m m a n d : x b )
(Main Picture Input)
G To select input source for main picture.
Transmission
[x][b][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Structure
MSB
0
LSB
0
0
0
0
0
0
External Input
Input Number
External Input
Data
23. Control Back Light (Command: m g)
( L C D T V/ L E D L C D T V o n l y )
0
0
0
0
DTV
G To Control the back light.
0
0
0
1
Analogue
0
0
1
0
AV
0
1
0
0
Component
0
1
1
0
RGB
1
0
0
1
HDMI
Transmission
[m][g][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data : data Min: 00 to Max: 64
Ack
[g][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
Input Number
Data
0
0
0
0
Input1
0
0
0
1
Input2
0
0
1
0
Input3
0
0
1
1
Input4
Ack
[b][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
APPENDIX
176
0
Open source software notice
The following GPL executables and LGPL/MPL libraries used in this product are subject to the
GPL2.0/LGPL2.1/MPL1.1 License Agreements:
GPL EXECUTABLES:
• Linux kernel 2.6
• busybox
• lzo
LGPL LIBRARIES:
• uClibc
MPL LIBRARIES:
• Nanox
LG Electronics offers to provide source code to you on CD-ROM for a charge covering the cost of performing
such distribution, such as the cost of media, shipping and handling upon e-mail request to LG Electronics at:
opensource@lge.com
This offer is valid for a period of three(3) years from the date of the distribution of this product by LG
Electronics.
You can obtain a copy of the GPL, LGPL, MPL licenses from http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/gpl2.0.html, http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html, http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/MPL-1.1.html.
Also you can obtain the translation of GPL, LGPL licenses from http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/gpl2.0-translations.html, http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1-translations.html.
This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group copyright © 1991 – 1998, Thomas
G. Lane.
This product includes
• libpng library : copyright © 2004 Glenn Randers-Pehrson
• Zlib compression library: Copyright © 1995-2002 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler.
• Tinyxml library : copyright (c) 2000-2006 Lee Thomason
APPENDIX
177
APPENDIX
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU
General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free
software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free
Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to
using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Lesser General Public License
instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to
make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or
use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software,
or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all
the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show
them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal
permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.
Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we
want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not
reflect on the original authors' reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors
of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we
have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
APPENDIX
178
0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it
may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, refers to any such program
or work, and a "work based on the Program" means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that
is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into
another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".) Each licensee is
addressed as "you".
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope.
The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program
is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running
the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of
any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License
along with the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in
exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the
Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you
also meet all of these conditions:
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any
change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the
Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this
License.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running
for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may
redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception:
if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the
Program is not required to print an announcement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the
Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its
terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same
sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the
intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work based on
the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this
License.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable
form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under
the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than
your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding
source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software
interchange; or,
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This
alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
APPENDIX
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable
work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary
form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs,
unless that component itself accompanies the executable.
179
APPENDIX
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering
equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code, even though
third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License.
Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate
your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will
not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not ccept
this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate
your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the
Program or works based on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically receives a
license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You
may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible
for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License.
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to
patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the
Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it
and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest
validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution
system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide
range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the
author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted
interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical
distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus
excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License from time to
time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems
or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which
applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of
any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of
this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
APPENDIX
180
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different,
write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to
the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals
of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software
generally.
NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING
THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY
OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE
QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS),
EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to
achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most
effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright" line and a pointer to
where the full notice is found.
<one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public
License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later
version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the
implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General
Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the
Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA.
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'. This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions;
type `show c' for details.
The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License.
Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they could even be
mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer"
for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989
Ty Coon, President of Vice
This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a
subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is
what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License.
APPENDIX
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program `Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.
181
APPENDIX
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2.1, February 1999
Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301
USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not
allowed.
[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public
License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.]
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU
General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the
software is free for all its users.
This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated software packages--typically
libraries--of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest
you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in
any particular case, based on the explanations below.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses are
designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you
wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of
it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to
surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the
library or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the
rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link other code
with the library, you must provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them with the library
after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license, which
gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.
To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the
library is modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know that what they have is not the original
version, so that the original author's reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others.
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We wish to make sure that a
company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder.
Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom
of use specified in this license.
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License. This license,
the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary
General Public License. We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non-free
programs.
When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordinary General Public License therefore permits
such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License permits more
lax criteria for linking other code with the library.
APPENDIX
We call this license the "Lesser" General Public License because it does Less to protect the user's freedom than the
ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing
non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many
libraries. However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances.
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library,
so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the library. A more
frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to
gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License.
In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a greater number of people to use
a large body of free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many
more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system.
182
Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users' freedom, it does ensure that the user of a
program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a "work based on the library" and a "work that uses the library". The former contains code derived from
the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run.
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the
copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public
License (also called "this License"). Each licensee is addressed as "you".
A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables.
The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms. A
"work based on the Library" means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work
containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into
another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".)
"Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a library, complete
source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus
the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library.
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope.
The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its
contents constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether
that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection
in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Library,
and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all
of these conditions:
a) The modified work must itself be a software library.
b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of
any change.
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this
License.
d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program
that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good
faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such function or table, the facility still operates,
and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful.
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the
Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its
terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same
sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
APPENDIX
(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of
the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function or table used by this function
must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square root function must still compute square roots.)
183
APPENDIX
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the
intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a work based on the
Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy
of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU
General Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU
General Public License has appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other
change in these notices.
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License
applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy.
This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library.
4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a
medium customarily used for software interchange.
If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent
access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even
though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being
compiled or linked with it, is called a "work that uses the Library". Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of
the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License.
However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library
(because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a "work that uses the library". The executable is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.
When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header file that is part of the Library, the object code for the
work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not.
Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library.
The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law.
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and
small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it
is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under
Section 6.)
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of
Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with
the Library itself.
6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a "work that uses the Library" with the Library
to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that
the terms permit modification of the work for the customer's own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications.
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its
use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing the
user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things:
APPENDIX
184
a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the Library including
whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work
is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete machine-readable "work that uses the Library", as object
code and/or source code, so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable
containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the
Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions.)
b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at
run time a copy of the library already present on the user's computer system, rather than copying library functions
into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified version of the library, if the user installs one, as
long as the modified version is interface-compatible with the version that the work was made with.
c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same user the materials
specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution.
d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to
copy the above specified materials from the same place.
e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy.
For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the Library" must include any data and utility programs
needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need
not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler,
kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies
the executable.
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in
an executable that you distribute.
7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single library together with
other library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate
distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided that
you do these two things:
a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined with any other
library facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above.
b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library, and
explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work.
8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this
License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under
this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept
this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the Library), you indicate your
acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or
works based on it.
10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient automatically receives a
license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.
11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to
patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the
Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and
this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.
12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted
interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus
excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
APPENDIX
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest
validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution
system which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide
range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the
author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
impose that choice.
185
APPENDIX
13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General Public License
from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address
new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version number of this License which
applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of
any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license version number,
you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software
Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing
and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY,
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY
AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU
ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT
NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU
OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF
SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries
If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, we recommend making it
free software that everyone can redistribute and change. You can do so by permitting redistribution under these terms
(or, alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary General Public License).
To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source
file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright" line and a
pointer to where the full notice is found.
<one line to give the library's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General
Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option)
any later version.
This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied
warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General
Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with this library; if not, write to
the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
APPENDIX
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer"
for the library, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library `Frob' (a library for tweaking knobs) written by
James Random Hacker.
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1990
Ty Coon, President of Vice
186
MOZILLA PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 1.1
--------------1. Definitions.
1.0.1. "Commercial Use" means distribution or otherwise making the Covered Code available to a third party.
1.1. "Contributor" means each entity that creates or contributes to the creation of Modifications.
1.2. "Contributor Version" means the combination of the Original Code, prior Modifications used by a Contributor,
and the Modifications made by that particular Contributor.
1.3. "Covered Code" means the Original Code or Modifications or the combination of the Original Code and
Modifications, in each case including portions thereof.
1.4. "Electronic Distribution Mechanism" means a mechanism generally accepted in the software development community for the electronic transfer of data.
1.5. "Executable" means Covered Code in any form other than Source Code.
1.6. "Initial Developer" means the individual or entity identified as the Initial Developer in the Source Code notice
required by Exhibit A.
1.7. "Larger Work" means a work which combines Covered Code or portions thereof with code not governed by the
terms of this License.
1.8. "License" means this document.
1.8.1. "Licensable" means having the right to grant, to the maximum extent possible, whether at the time of the initial grant or subsequently acquired, any and all of the rights conveyed herein.
1.9. "Modifications" means any addition to or deletion from the substance or structure of either the Original Code or
any previous Modifications. When Covered Code is released as a series of files, a Modification is:
A. Any addition to or deletion from the contents of a file containing Original Code or previous Modifications.
B. Any new file that contains any part of the Original Code or previous Modifications.
1.10. "Original Code" means Source Code of computer software code which is described in the Source Code notice
required by Exhibit A as Original Code, and which, at the time of its release under this License is not already
Covered Code governed by this License.
1.10.1. "Patent Claims" means any patent claim(s), now owned or hereafter acquired, including without limitation,
method, process, and apparatus claims, in any patent Licensable by grantor.
1.11. "Source Code" means the preferred form of the Covered Code for making modifications to it, including all
modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, scripts used to control compilation and installation
of an Executable, or source code differential comparisons against either the Original Code or another well known,
available Covered Code of the Contributor's choice. The Source Code can be in a compressed or archival form,
provided the appropriate decompression or de-archiving software is widely available for no charge.
1.12. "You" (or "Your") means an individual or a legal entity exercising rights under, and complying with all of the
terms of, this License or a future version of this License issued under Section 6.1.
For legal entities, "You" includes any entity which controls, is controlled by, or is under common control with You.
For purposes of this definition, "control" means (a) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (b) ownership of more than fifty percent (50%) of the outstanding shares or beneficial ownership of such entity.
2.1. The Initial Developer Grant.
The Initial Developer hereby grants You a world-wide, royalty-free, non-exclusive license, subject to third party intellectual property claims:
(a) under intellectual property rights (other than patent or trademark) Licensable by Initial Developer to use,
reproduce, modify, display, perform, sublicense and distribute the Original Code (or portions thereof) with or
without Modifications, and/or as part of a Larger Work; and
APPENDIX
2. Source Code License.
187
APPENDIX
(b) under Patents Claims infringed by the making, using or selling of Original Code, to make, have made, use,
practice, sell, and offer for sale, and/or otherwise dispose of the Original Code (or portions thereof).
(c) the licenses granted in this Section 2.1(a) and (b) are effective on the date Initial Developer first distributes
Original Code under the terms of this License.
(d) Notwithstanding Section 2.1(b) above, no patent license is granted: 1) for code that You delete from the
Original Code; 2) separate from the Original Code; or 3) for infringements caused by: i) the modification of the
Original Code or ii) the combination of the Original Code with other software or devices.
2.2. Contributor Grant.
Subject to third party intellectual property claims, each Contributor hereby grants You a world-wide, royalty-free,
non-exclusive license
(a) under intellectual property rights (other than patent or trademark) Licensable by Contributor, to use, reproduce, modify, display, perform, sublicense and distribute the Modifications created by such Contributor (or portions thereof) either on an unmodified basis, with other Modifications, as Covered Code and/or as part of a
Larger Work; and
(b) under Patent Claims infringed by the making, using, or selling of Modifications made by that Contributor
either alone and/or in combination with its Contributor Version (or portions of such combination), to make, use,
sell, offer for sale, have made, and/or otherwise dispose of: 1) Modifications made by that Contributor (or portions
thereof); and 2) the combination of Modifications made by that Contributor with its Contributor Version (or portions of such combination).
(c) the licenses granted in Sections 2.2(a) and 2.2(b) are effective on the date Contributor first makes
Commercial Use of the Covered Code.
(d) Notwithstanding Section 2.2(b) above, no patent license is granted: 1) for any code that Contributor has deleted from the Contributor Version; 2) separate from the Contributor Version; 3) for infringements caused by: i)
third party modifications of Contributor Version or ii) the combination of Modifications made by that Contributor
with other software (except as part of the Contributor Version) or other devices; or 4) under Patent Claims
infringed by Covered Code in the absence of Modifications made by that Contributor.
3. Distribution Obligations.
3.1. Application of License.
The Modifications which You create or to which You contribute are governed by the terms of this License, including
without limitation Section 2.2. The Source Code version of Covered Code may be distributed only under the terms of
this License or a future version of this License released under Section 6.1, and You must include a copy of this
License with every copy of the Source Code You distribute. You may not offer or impose any terms on any Source
Code version that alters or restricts the applicable version of this License or the recipients' rights hereunder.
However, You may include an additional document offering the additional rights described in Section 3.5.
3.2. Availability of Source Code.
Any Modification which You create or to which You contribute must be made available in Source Code form under
the terms of this License either on the same media as an Executable version or via an accepted Electronic
Distribution Mechanism to anyone to whom you made an Executable version available; and if made available via
Electronic Distribution Mechanism, must remain available for at least twelve (12) months after the date it initially
became available, or at least six (6) months after a subsequent version of that particular Modification has been
made available to such recipients. You are responsible for ensuring that the Source Code version remains available
even if the
Electronic Distribution Mechanism is maintained by a third party.
3.3. Description of Modifications.
You must cause all Covered Code to which You contribute to contain a file documenting the changes You made to
create that Covered Code and the date of any change. You must include a prominent statement that the Modification
is derived, directly or indirectly, from Original Code provided by the Initial Developer and including the name of the
Initial Developer in (a) the Source Code, and (b) in any notice in an Executable version or related documentation in
which You describe the origin or ownership of the Covered Code.
APPENDIX
188
3.4. Intellectual Property Matters
(a) Third Party Claims.
If Contributor has knowledge that a license under a third party's intellectual property rights is required to exercise
the rights granted by such Contributor under Sections 2.1 or 2.2, Contributor must include a text file with the
Source Code distribution titled "LEGAL" which describes the claim and the party making the claim in sufficient
detail that a recipient will know whom to contact. If Contributor obtains such knowledge after the Modification is
made available as described in Section 3.2, Contributor shall promptly modify the LEGAL file in all copies
Contributor makes available thereafter and shall take other steps (such as notifying appropriate mailing lists or
newsgroups) reasonably calculated to inform those who received the Covered Code that new knowledge has
been obtained.
(b) Contributor APIs.
If Contributor's Modifications include an application programming interface and Contributor has knowledge of
patent licenses which are reasonably necessary to implement that API, Contributor must also include this information in the LEGAL file.
(c) Representations.
Contributor represents that, except as disclosed pursuant to Section 3.4(a) above, Contributor believes that
Contributor's Modifications are Contributor's original creation(s) and/or Contributor has sufficient rights to grant
the rights conveyed by this License.
3.5. Required Notices.
You must duplicate the notice in Exhibit A in each file of the Source Code. If it is not possible to put such notice in a
particular Source Code file due to its structure, then You must include such notice in a location (such as a relevant
directory) where a user would be likely to look for such a notice. If You created one or more Modification(s)
You may add your name as a Contributor to the notice described in Exhibit A. You must also duplicate this License
in any documentation for the Source Code where You describe recipients' rights or ownership rights relating to
Covered Code. You may choose to offer, and to charge a fee for, warranty, support, indemnity or liability obligations
to one or more recipients of Covered Code. However, You may do so only on Your own behalf, and not on behalf of
the Initial
Developer or any Contributor. You must make it absolutely clear than any such warranty, support, indemnity or liability obligation is offered by You alone, and You hereby agree to indemnify the Initial Developer and every Contributor
for any liability incurred by the Initial Developer or such Contributor as a result of warranty, support, indemnity or liability terms You offer.
3.6. Distribution of Executable Versions.
You may distribute Covered Code in Executable form only if the requirements of Section 3.1-3.5 have been met for
that Covered Code, and if You include a notice stating that the Source Code version of the Covered Code is available under the terms of this License, including a description of how and where You have fulfilled the obligations of
Section 3.2. The notice must be conspicuously included in any notice in an Executable version, related documentation or collateral in which You describe recipients' rights relating to the Covered Code. You may distribute the
Executable version of Covered Code or ownership rights under a license of Your choice, which may contain terms
different from this License, provided that You are in compliance with the terms of this License and that the license
for the Executable version does not attempt to limit or alter the recipient's rights in the Source Code version from
the rights set forth in this
License. If You distribute the Executable version under a different license You must make it absolutely clear that any
terms which differ from this License are offered by You alone, not by the Initial Developer or any Contributor. You
hereby agree to indemnify the Initial Developer and every Contributor for any liability incurred by the Initial
Developer or such Contributor as a result of any such terms You offer.
3.7. Larger Works.
You may create a Larger Work by combining Covered Code with other code not governed by the terms of this
License and distribute the Larger Work as a single product. In such a case, You must make sure the requirements
of this License are fulfilled for the Covered Code.
4. Inability to Comply Due to Statute or Regulation.
If it is impossible for You to comply with any of the terms of this License with respect to some or all of the Covered
Code due to statute, judicial order, or regulation then You must: (a) comply with the terms of this License to the maximum extent possible; and (b) describe the limitations and the code they affect. Such description must be included in
the LEGAL file described in Section 3.4 and must be included with all distributions of the Source Code. Except to
the
extent prohibited by statute or regulation, such description must be sufficiently detailed for a recipient of ordinary
skill to be able to understand it.
5. Application of this License.
This License applies to code to which the Initial Developer has attached the notice in Exhibit A and to related
Covered Code.
6. Versions of the License.
6.2. Effect of New Versions.
Once Covered Code has been published under a particular version of the License, You may always continue to use
it under the terms of that version. You may also choose to use such Covered Code under the terms of any subsequent version of the License published by Netscape. No one other than Netscape has the right to modify the terms
applicable to Covered Code created under this License.
APPENDIX
6.1. New Versions.
Netscape Communications Corporation ("Netscape") may publish revised and/or new versions of the License from
time to time. Each version will be given a distinguishing version number.
189
APPENDIX
6.3. Derivative Works.
If You create or use a modified version of this License (which you may only do in order to apply it to code which is
not already Covered Code governed by this License), You must (a) rename Your license so that the phrases
"Mozilla", "MOZILLAPL", "MOZPL", "Netscape", "MPL", "NPL" or any confusingly similar phrase do not appear in
your license (except to note that your license differs from this License) and (b) otherwise make it clear that Your version of the license contains terms which differ from the Mozilla Public License and Netscape Public License. (Filling
in the name of the Initial Developer, Original Code or Contributor in the notice described in Exhibit A shall not of
themselves be deemed to be modifications of this License.)
7. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY.
COVERED CODE IS PROVIDED UNDER THIS LICENSE ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE COVERED CODE IS FREE OF DEFECTS, MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE COVERED CODE IS WITH YOU.
SHOULD ANY COVERED CODE PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT THE INITIAL DEVELOPER OR
ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF ANY
COVERED CODE IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER.
8. TERMINATION.
8.1. This License and the rights granted hereunder will terminate automatically if You fail to comply with terms herein and fail to cure such breach within 30 days of becoming aware of the breach. All sublicenses to the Covered
Code which are properly granted shall survive any termination of this License. Provisions which, by their nature,
must remain in effect beyond the termination of this License shall survive.
8.2. If You initiate litigation by asserting a patent infringement claim (excluding declatory judgment actions) against
Initial Developer or a Contributor (the Initial Developer or Contributor against whom You file such action is referred
to as "Participant") alleging that:
(a) such Participant's Contributor Version directly or indirectly infringes any patent, then any and all rights granted
by such Participant to You under Sections 2.1 and/or 2.2 of this License shall, upon 60 days notice from Participant
terminate prospectively, unless if within 60 days after receipt of notice You either: (i) agree in writing to pay
Participant a mutually agreeable reasonable royalty for Your past and future use of Modifications made by such
Participant, or (ii) withdraw Your litigation claim with respect to the Contributor Version against such Participant. If
within 60 days of notice, a reasonable royalty and payment arrangement are not mutually agreed upon in writing by
the parties or the litigation claim is not withdrawn, the rights granted by Participant to You under Sections 2.1 and/or
2.2 automatically terminate at the expiration of the 60 day notice period specified above.
(b) any software, hardware, or device, other than such Participant's Contributor Version, directly or indirectly
infringes any patent, then any rights granted to You by such Participant under Sections 2.1(b) and 2.2(b) are
revoked effective as of the date You first made, used, sold, distributed, or had made, Modifications made by that
Participant.
8.3. If You assert a patent infringement claim against Participant alleging that such Participant's Contributor Version
directly or indirectly infringes any patent where such claim is resolved (such as by license or settlement) prior to the
initiation of patent infringement litigation, then the reasonable value of the licenses granted by such Participant
under Sections 2.1 or 2.2 shall be taken into account in determining the amount or value of any payment or license.
8.4. In the event of termination under Sections 8.1 or 8.2 above, all end user license agreements (excluding distributors and resellers) which have been validly granted by You or any distributor hereunder prior to termination shall
survive termination.
9. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY.
APPENDIX
190
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL YOU, THE INITIAL DEVELOPER, ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTOR, OR
ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF COVERED CODE,OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY
PERSON FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER
INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER
FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, EVEN IF SUCH
PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SHALL NOT APPLY TO LIABILITY FOR DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY RESULTING FROM SUCH PARTY'S
NEGLIGENCE TO THE EXTENT APPLICABLE LAW PROHIBITS SUCH LIMITATION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO
NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THIS
EXCLUSION AND LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
10. U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS.
The Covered Code is a "commercial item," as that term is defined in 48 C.F.R. 2.101 (Oct. 1995), consisting of
"commercial computer software" and "commercial computer software documentation," as such terms are used in 48
C.F.R. 12.212 (Sept. 1995). Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4 (June
1995), all U.S. Government End Users acquire Covered Code with only those rights set forth herein.
11. MISCELLANEOUS.
This License represents the complete agreement concerning subject matter hereof. If any provision of this License
is held to be unenforceable, such provision shall be reformed only to the extent necessary to make it enforceable. This
License shall be governed by California law provisions (except to the extent applicable law, if any, provides otherwise),
excluding its conflict-of-law provisions. With respect to disputes in which at least one party is a citizen of, or an entity
chartered or registered to do business in the United States of America, any litigation relating to this License shall be
subject to the jurisdiction of the Federal Courts of the Northern District of California, with venue lying in Santa Clara
County, California, with the losing party responsible for costs, including without limitation, court costs and reasonable
attorneys' fees and expenses. The application of the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale
of Goods is expressly excluded. Any law or regulation which provides that the language of a contract shall be construed
against the drafter shall not apply to this License.
12. RESPONSIBILITY FOR CLAIMS.
As between Initial Developer and the Contributors, each party is responsible for claims and damages arising, directly or indirectly, out of its utilization of rights under this License and You agree to work with Initial Developer and
Contributors to distribute such responsibility on an equitable basis. Nothing herein is intended or shall be deemed to
constitute any admission of liability.
13. MULTIPLE-LICENSED CODE.
Initial Developer may designate portions of the Covered Code as "Multiple-Licensed". "Multiple-Licensed" means
that the Initial Developer permits you to utilize portions of the Covered Code under Your choice of the NPL or the alternative licenses, if any, specified by the Initial Developer in the file described in Exhibit A.
EXHIBIT A -Mozilla Public License.
``The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla Public License Version 1.1 (the "License"); you may not use this
file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/
Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the License.
The Original Code is ______________________________________.
The Initial Developer of the Original Code is ________________________.
Portions created by ______________________ are Copyright (C) ______
_______________________. All Rights Reserved.
Contributor(s): ______________________________________.
[NOTE: The text of this Exhibit A may differ slightly from the text of the notices in the Source Code files of the
Original Code. You should use the text of this Exhibit A rather than the text found in the Original Code Source Code for
Your Modifications.]
APPENDIX
Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used under the terms of the _____ license (the "[___] License"), in
which case the provisions of [______] License are applicable instead of those above. If you wish to allow use of your
version of this file only under the terms of the [____] License and not to allow others to use your version of this file
under the MPL, indicate your decision by deleting the provisions above and replace them with the notice and other
provisions required by the [___] License. If you do not delete the provisions above, a recipient may use your version of
this file under either the MPL or the [___] License."
191
Download PDF